Zebra reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability, ... For instructions on downloading CDC drivers see page 7-6.
DS2278
MN-002915-02
Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
DS2278 DIGITAL SCANNER PRODUCT REFERENCE GUIDE
MN-002915-02 Revision A
August 2017
ii
DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form, or by any electrical or mechanical means, without permission in writing from Zebra. This includes electronic or mechanical means, such as photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems. The material in this manual is subject to change without notice.
The software is provided strictly on an "as is" basis. All software, including firmware, furnished to the user is on a licensed basis. Zebra grants to the user a non-transferable and non-exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder (licensed program). Except as noted below, such license may not be assigned, sub-licensed, or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Zebra. No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted, except as permitted under copyright law. The user shall not modify, merge, or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material, create a derivative work from a licensed program, or use a licensed program in a network without written permission from Zebra. The user agrees to maintain Zebra's copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered hereunder, and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes, in whole or in part. The user agrees not to decompile, disassemble, decode, or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any portion thereof.
Zebra reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability, function, or design.
Zebra does not assume any product liability arising out of, or in connection with, the application or use of any product, circuit, or application described herein.
No license is granted, either expressly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise under any Zebra Technologies Corporation, intellectual property rights. An implied license only exists for equipment, circuits, and subsystems contained in Zebra products.
Warranty
For the complete Zebra hardware product warranty statement, go to: www.zebra.com/warranty.
Revision History
Changes to the original guide are listed below:
Change MN-002915-01 Rev. A MN-002915-02 Rev. A
Date 7/2017 8/2017
Description Initial Release. Removed "Microsoft UWP Bluetooth" information.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Warranty ............................................................................................................................................ ii Revision History ................................................................................................................................. ii
About This Guide Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... xvii Configurations................................................................................................................................. xvii Related Product Line Configurations ............................................................................................. xviii Cables ...................................................................................................................................... xviii Chapter Descriptions ..................................................................................................................... xviii Notational Conventions.................................................................................................................... xix Related Documents ......................................................................................................................... xx Service Information .......................................................................................................................... xx Provide Documentation Feedback ................................................................................................... xx
Chapter 1: Getting Started Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 1-1 Interfaces ....................................................................................................................................... 1-2 Unpacking ...................................................................................................................................... 1-2 DS2278 Features ........................................................................................................................... 1-3 Cradle Features ............................................................................................................................. 1-3 Presentation Cradle ................................................................................................................. 1-4 Connecting the Cradle ............................................................................................................. 1-4 Changing the Host Interface .................................................................................................... 1-4 Using a DC Power Supply ........................................................................................................ 1-5 Charging the DS2278 Battery ........................................................................................................ 1-5 Charging Using the Cradle ....................................................................................................... 1-5 Charging Using the Micro USB Cable ...................................................................................... 1-6 Shutting Off the Digital Scanner Battery ........................................................................................ 1-7 Inserting the Battery ....................................................................................................................... 1-7 Removing the Battery .................................................................................................................... 1-8 Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle .................................................................................... 1-9 Sending Data to the Host Computer .............................................................................................. 1-9 Pairing ...................................................................................................................................... 1-9
iv DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Lost Connection to Host ......................................................................................................... 1-10 Configuring the Digital Scanner ................................................................................................... 1-10 Radio Communications ................................................................................................................ 1-10 Accessories .................................................................................................................................. 1-10
Chapter 2: Data Capture Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 2-1 Beeper and LED Indications .......................................................................................................... 2-1 Digital Scanner Indications ....................................................................................................... 2-1 Cradle LED Indications ............................................................................................................ 2-5 Scanning ........................................................................................................................................ 2-6 Hand-Held Scanning ................................................................................................................ 2-6 Hands-Free Scanning .............................................................................................................. 2-7 Aiming with Digital Scanner ..................................................................................................... 2-8 Aiming ...................................................................................................................................... 2-8 Decode Ranges ............................................................................................................................. 2-8
Chapter 3: Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 3-1 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................. 3-1 Known Harmful Ingredients ...................................................................................................... 3-1 Approved Cleaners for the Digital Scanner and Cradle ........................................................... 3-2 Cleaning the Digital Scanner .................................................................................................... 3-2 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................. 3-3 Report Software Version Bar Code .......................................................................................... 3-7 Technical Specifications ................................................................................................................ 3-8 Cradle Signal Descriptions ........................................................................................................... 3-11
Chapter 4: User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 4-1 Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 4-1 Scanning Sequence Examples ................................................................................................ 4-2 Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................. 4-2 User Preferences/Miscellaneous Options Parameter Defaults ...................................................... 4-2 User Preferences ........................................................................................................................... 4-5 Default Parameters .................................................................................................................. 4-5 Parameter Bar Code Scanning ................................................................................................ 4-6 Beep After Good Decode ......................................................................................................... 4-6 Beeper Volume ........................................................................................................................ 4-7 Beeper Tone ............................................................................................................................ 4-8 Beeper Duration ....................................................................................................................... 4-9 Suppress Power Up Beeps ...................................................................................................... 4-9 Direct Decode Indicator .......................................................................................................... 4-10 Low Power Mode ................................................................................................................... 4-11 Time Delay to Low Power Mode ............................................................................................ 4-12 Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Aim .......................................................................... 4-14 Battery Preservation Mode ..................................................................................................... 4-15 Trigger Mode .......................................................................................................................... 4-16 Hands-Free Mode .................................................................................................................. 4-17
Table of Contents v
Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern ........................................................................................ 4-18 Hands-Free (Presentation) Decode Aiming Pattern ............................................................... 4-19 Picklist Mode .......................................................................................................................... 4-20 Continuous Bar Code Read ................................................................................................... 4-21 Unique Bar Code Reporting ................................................................................................... 4-21 Decode Session Timeout ....................................................................................................... 4-22 Hands-Free Decode Session Timeout ................................................................................... 4-22 Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol ............................................................................ 4-23 Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols ...................................................................... 4-23 Decode Mirror Images (Data Matrix Only) ............................................................................. 4-24 Mobile Phone/Display Mode .................................................................................................. 4-24 PDF Prioritization ................................................................................................................... 4-25 PDF Prioritization Timeout ..................................................................................................... 4-25 Decoding Illumination ............................................................................................................. 4-26 Illumination Brightness ........................................................................................................... 4-26 Low Light Scene Detection .................................................................................................... 4-27 Motion Tolerance (Hand-Held Trigger Modes Only) .............................................................. 4-28 Product ID (PID) Type ............................................................................................................ 4-29 Product ID (PID) Value ........................................................................................................... 4-29 ECLevel .................................................................................................................................. 4-30 Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters ............................................................................................ 4-31 Enter Key ............................................................................................................................... 4-31 Tab Key .................................................................................................................................. 4-31 Transmit Code ID Character .................................................................................................. 4-32 Prefix/Suffix Values ................................................................................................................ 4-33 Scan Data Transmission Format ............................................................................................ 4-34 FN1 Substitution Values ......................................................................................................... 4-36 Transmit "No Read" Message ................................................................................................ 4-37 Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval ................................................................................................ 4-38 Send Versions .............................................................................................................................. 4-39 Software Version .................................................................................................................... 4-39 Serial Number ........................................................................................................................ 4-39 Manufacturing Information ..................................................................................................... 4-39
Chapter 5: Radio Communications Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 5-1 Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 5-1 Scanning Sequence Examples ................................................................................................ 5-2 Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................. 5-2 Radio Communications Parameter Defaults .................................................................................. 5-2 Wireless Beeper Definitions ........................................................................................................... 5-4 Radio Communication Host Types ................................................................................................ 5-4 Bluetooth Classic vs. Low Energy Bluetooth ............................................................................ 5-4 Cradle ....................................................................................................................................... 5-4 Human Interface Device (HID) Keyboard Emulation ................................................................ 5-5 Simple Serial Interface (SSI) .................................................................................................... 5-6 Serial Port Profile (SPP) ........................................................................................................... 5-8 Bluetooth Technology Profile Support ...................................................................................... 5-8 Master/Slave Set Up ................................................................................................................ 5-8 Bluetooth Friendly Name ............................................................................................................... 5-9
vi DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Discoverable Mode ................................................................................................................ 5-10 Wi-Fi Friendly Mode ..................................................................................................................... 5-11
Notes ...................................................................................................................................... 5-11 Wi-Fi Friendly Channel Exclusion .......................................................................................... 5-11 Radio Output Power ..................................................................................................................... 5-13 Link Supervision Timeout ....................................................................................................... 5-14 Bluetooth Radio State .................................................................................................................. 5-15 HID Host Parameters ................................................................................................................... 5-15 Bluetooth HID - Wait for Connection ...................................................................................... 5-15 Apple iOS Virtual Keyboard Toggle ....................................................................................... 5-16 HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay ............................................................................................. 5-17 HID CAPS Lock Override ....................................................................................................... 5-17 HID Ignore Unknown Characters ........................................................................................... 5-18 Emulate Keypad ..................................................................................................................... 5-18 Fast HID Keyboard ................................................................................................................. 5-19 Quick Keypad Emulation ........................................................................................................ 5-19 HID Keyboard FN1 Substitution ............................................................................................. 5-20 HID Function Key Mapping .................................................................................................... 5-20 Simulated Caps Lock ............................................................................................................. 5-21 Convert Case ......................................................................................................................... 5-21 Auto-Reconnect Feature .............................................................................................................. 5-22 Reconnect Attempt Beep Feedback ...................................................................................... 5-22 Reconnect Attempt Interval .................................................................................................... 5-23 Auto-Reconnect ..................................................................................................................... 5-24 Out of Range Indicator ................................................................................................................. 5-24 Beep on Insertion ......................................................................................................................... 5-25 Beep on <BEL> ............................................................................................................................ 5-25 Digital Scanner To Cradle Support .............................................................................................. 5-26 Pairing .................................................................................................................................... 5-26 Pairing Methods ..................................................................................................................... 5-27 Pairing Bar Code Format ....................................................................................................... 5-29 Connection Maintenance Interval ........................................................................................... 5-29 Batch Mode .................................................................................................................................. 5-31 Modes of Operation ................................................................................................................ 5-32 Persistent Batch Storage ............................................................................................................. 5-34 Bluetooth Classic and/or Low Energy (Cradle Parameter Only/Cradle Host Only) ..................... 5-34 Bluetooth Security ........................................................................................................................ 5-35 PIN Code ................................................................................................................................ 5-35 Bluetooth Security Levels ....................................................................................................... 5-36 Bluetooth Radio, Linking, and Batch Operation ........................................................................... 5-39 Setting Up an iOS or Android Product To Work With The Digital Scanner ............................ 5-39 Save Bluetooth Connection Information ...................................................................................... 5-40
Chapter 6: Signature Capture Preferences Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 6-1 Setting Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 6-1 Scanning Sequence Examples ................................................................................................ 6-2 Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................. 6-2 Signature Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults ..................................................................... 6-2 Signature Capture Preferences ..................................................................................................... 6-3
Table of Contents vii
Signature Capture .................................................................................................................... 6-3 Signature Capture File Format Selector ................................................................................... 6-4 Signature Capture Bits Per Pixel .............................................................................................. 6-5 Signature Capture Width .......................................................................................................... 6-6 Signature Capture Height ......................................................................................................... 6-6 Signature Capture JPEG Quality ............................................................................................. 6-6
Chapter 7: USB Interface Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 7-1 Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 7-1 Scanning Sequence Examples ................................................................................................ 7-1 Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................. 7-1 Connecting a USB Interface .......................................................................................................... 7-2 USB Parameter Defaults ................................................................................................................ 7-3 USB Host Parameters .................................................................................................................... 7-5 USB Device Type ..................................................................................................................... 7-5 Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking .................................................................... 7-7 Native Firmware Update .......................................................................................................... 7-7 USB Keystroke Delay ............................................................................................................... 7-8 USB CAPS Lock Override ........................................................................................................ 7-8 Bar Codes with Unknown Characters ...................................................................................... 7-9 USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 .......................................................................................... 7-9 USB Fast HID ........................................................................................................................... 7-9 USB Polling Interval ............................................................................................................... 7-11 Keypad Emulation .................................................................................................................. 7-13 Quick Keypad Emulation ........................................................................................................ 7-13 Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero .................................................................................... 7-14 USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution ............................................................................................ 7-14 Function Key Mapping ........................................................................................................... 7-15 Simulated Caps Lock ............................................................................................................. 7-15 Convert Case ......................................................................................................................... 7-16 USB Static CDC ..................................................................................................................... 7-16 CDC Beep on <BEL> ............................................................................................................. 7-17 TGCS (IBM) USB Direct I/O Beep ......................................................................................... 7-17 TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive ........................................................................................... 7-18 TGCS (IBM) USB Bar Code Configuration Directive ............................................................. 7-18 TGCS (IBM) USB Specification Version ................................................................................ 7-19 ASCII Character Sets for USB ..................................................................................................... 7-19
Chapter 8: SSI Interface Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 8-1 Communication .............................................................................................................................. 8-1 SSI Transactions ............................................................................................................................ 8-3 General Data Transactions ...................................................................................................... 8-3 Decoded Data Transmission .................................................................................................... 8-4 Communication Summary .............................................................................................................. 8-6 RTS/CTS Lines ........................................................................................................................ 8-6 ACK/NAK Option ...................................................................................................................... 8-6 Number of Data Bits ................................................................................................................. 8-6
viii DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Serial Response Timeout ......................................................................................................... 8-6 Retries ...................................................................................................................................... 8-6 Baud Rate, Stop Bits, Parity, Response Timeout, ACK/NAK Handshaking ............................. 8-6 Errors ....................................................................................................................................... 8-6 SSI Communication Notes ....................................................................................................... 8-7 Using Time Delay to Low Power Mode with SSI ............................................................................ 8-7 Encapsulation of RSM Commands/Responses over SSI .............................................................. 8-8 Command Structure ................................................................................................................. 8-8 Response Structure ................................................................................................................. 8-8 Example Transaction ............................................................................................................... 8-9 Setting Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 8-10 Scanning Sequence Examples .............................................................................................. 8-10 Errors While Scanning ........................................................................................................... 8-10 Simple Serial Interface Parameter Defaults ................................................................................. 8-11 SSI Host Parameters ................................................................................................................... 8-12 Select SSI Host ...................................................................................................................... 8-12 Baud Rate .............................................................................................................................. 8-12 Parity ...................................................................................................................................... 8-14 Check Parity ........................................................................................................................... 8-15 Stop Bits ................................................................................................................................. 8-15 Software Handshaking ........................................................................................................... 8-16 Host RTS Line State .............................................................................................................. 8-17 Decode Data Packet Format .................................................................................................. 8-17 Host Serial Response Timeout .............................................................................................. 8-18 Host Character Timeout ......................................................................................................... 8-19 Multipacket Option ................................................................................................................. 8-20 Interpacket Delay ................................................................................................................... 8-21 Event Reporting ........................................................................................................................... 8-22 Decode Event ......................................................................................................................... 8-22 Boot Up Event ........................................................................................................................ 8-23 Parameter Event .................................................................................................................... 8-23
Chapter 9: RS-232 Interface Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 9-1 Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 9-1 Scanning Sequence Examples ................................................................................................ 9-2 Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................. 9-2 Connecting an RS-232 Interface .................................................................................................... 9-2 RS-232 Parameter Defaults ........................................................................................................... 9-3 RS-232 Host Parameters ............................................................................................................... 9-4 RS-232 Host Types .................................................................................................................. 9-6 Baud Rate ................................................................................................................................ 9-8 Parity ........................................................................................................................................ 9-9 Stop Bits ................................................................................................................................... 9-9 Data Bits ................................................................................................................................. 9-10 Check Receive Errors ............................................................................................................ 9-10 Hardware Handshaking .......................................................................................................... 9-11 Software Handshaking ........................................................................................................... 9-13 Host Serial Response Timeout .............................................................................................. 9-15 RTS Line State ....................................................................................................................... 9-16
Table of Contents ix
Beep on <BEL> ...................................................................................................................... 9-16 Intercharacter Delay ............................................................................................................... 9-17 Nixdorf Beep/LED Options ..................................................................................................... 9-18 Bar Codes with Unknown Characters .................................................................................... 9-18 ASCII Character Set for RS-232 .................................................................................................. 9-18
Chapter 10: IBM 468X / 469X Interface Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 10-1 Setting Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 10-1 Scanning Sequence Examples .............................................................................................. 10-1 Errors While Scanning ........................................................................................................... 10-2 Connecting an IBM 468X/469X Host ........................................................................................... 10-2 IBM Parameter Defaults ............................................................................................................... 10-3 IBM Host Parameters ................................................................................................................... 10-4 Port Address .......................................................................................................................... 10-4 Convert Unknown to Code 39 ................................................................................................ 10-5 RS-485 Beep Directive ........................................................................................................... 10-5 RS-485 Bar Code Configuration Directive ............................................................................. 10-6 IBM-485 Specification Version ............................................................................................... 10-6
Chapter 11: Keyboard Wedge Interface Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 11-1 Setting Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 11-1 Scanning Sequence Examples .............................................................................................. 11-1 Errors While Scanning ........................................................................................................... 11-1 Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface .................................................................................... 11-2 Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults ......................................................................................... 11-3 Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters ............................................................................................. 11-4 Keyboard Wedge Host Types ................................................................................................ 11-4 Bar Codes with Unknown Characters .................................................................................... 11-4 Keystroke Delay ..................................................................................................................... 11-5 Intra-keystroke Delay ............................................................................................................. 11-5 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation .................................................................................... 11-6 Quick Keypad Emulation ........................................................................................................ 11-6 Simulated Caps Lock ............................................................................................................. 11-7 Caps Lock Override ............................................................................................................... 11-7 Convert Case ......................................................................................................................... 11-8 Function Key Mapping ........................................................................................................... 11-8 FN1 Substitution ..................................................................................................................... 11-9 Send Make and Break ............................................................................................................ 11-9 Keyboard Map ............................................................................................................................ 11-10 ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge ................................................................................ 11-10
Chapter 12: Symbologies Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 12-1 Setting Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 12-1 Scanning Sequence Examples .............................................................................................. 12-2 Errors While Scanning ........................................................................................................... 12-2 Symbology Parameter Defaults ................................................................................................... 12-2
x DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Enable/Disable All Code Types ................................................................................................... 12-8 UPC/EAN/JAN ............................................................................................................................. 12-9
UPC-A .................................................................................................................................... 12-9 UPC-E .................................................................................................................................... 12-9 UPC-E1 ................................................................................................................................ 12-10 EAN-8/JAN-8 ........................................................................................................................ 12-10 EAN-13/JAN-13 .................................................................................................................... 12-11 Bookland EAN ...................................................................................................................... 12-11 Bookland ISBN Format ........................................................................................................ 12-12 ISSN EAN ............................................................................................................................ 12-12 Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals ............................................................................... 12-13 User-Programmable Supplementals .................................................................................... 12-16 UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy ......................................................................... 12-16 UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format ...................................................................... 12-17 Transmit UPC-A Check Digit ................................................................................................ 12-18 Transmit UPC-E Check Digit ................................................................................................ 12-18 Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit .............................................................................................. 12-19 UPC-A Preamble .................................................................................................................. 12-20 UPC-E Preamble .................................................................................................................. 12-21 UPC-E1 Preamble ................................................................................................................ 12-22 Convert UPC-E to UPC-A .................................................................................................... 12-23 Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A .................................................................................................. 12-23 EAN/JAN Zero Extend ......................................................................................................... 12-24 UCC Coupon Extended Code .............................................................................................. 12-24 Coupon Report ..................................................................................................................... 12-25 UPC Reduced Quiet Zone ................................................................................................... 12-25 Code 128 ................................................................................................................................... 12-26 Set Lengths for Code 128 .................................................................................................... 12-26 GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) ...................................................................................... 12-27 ISBT 128 .............................................................................................................................. 12-28 ISBT Concatenation ............................................................................................................. 12-29 Check ISBT Table ................................................................................................................ 12-30 ISBT Concatenation Redundancy ........................................................................................ 12-30 Code 128 <FNC4> ............................................................................................................... 12-31 Code 128 Security Level ...................................................................................................... 12-31 Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone ........................................................................................... 12-32 Code 39 ..................................................................................................................................... 12-33 Trioptic Code 39 ................................................................................................................... 12-33 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 ............................................................................................... 12-34 Code 32 Prefix ..................................................................................................................... 12-34 Set Lengths for Code 39 ...................................................................................................... 12-35 Code 39 Check Digit Verification ......................................................................................... 12-36 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit ............................................................................................. 12-37 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion ........................................................................................... 12-37 Code 39 Security Level ........................................................................................................ 12-38 Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone ............................................................................................. 12-40 Code 93 ..................................................................................................................................... 12-40 Set Lengths for Code 93 ...................................................................................................... 12-41 Code 11 ..................................................................................................................................... 12-43 Set Lengths for Code 11 ...................................................................................................... 12-43
Table of Contents xi
Code 11 Check Digit Verification ......................................................................................... 12-45 Transmit Code 11 Check Digits ........................................................................................... 12-46 Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF/I 2 of 5) .................................................................................................. 12-46 Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 ........................................................................................ 12-47 I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................................ 12-49 Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit ................................................................................................ 12-50 Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 ................................................................................................... 12-50 Febraban .............................................................................................................................. 12-51 I 2 of 5 Security Level ........................................................................................................... 12-52 I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone ................................................................................................ 12-53 Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF/D 2 of 5) .................................................................................................... 12-53 Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 ............................................................................................. 12-54 Codabar (NW - 7) ....................................................................................................................... 12-56 Set Lengths for Codabar ...................................................................................................... 12-56 CLSI Editing ......................................................................................................................... 12-58 NOTIS Editing ...................................................................................................................... 12-58 Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/Stop Characters ......................................................... 12-59 MSI ............................................................................................................................................. 12-59 Set Lengths for MSI ............................................................................................................. 12-60 MSI Check Digits .................................................................................................................. 12-62 Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) ................................................................................................ 12-62 MSI Check Digit Algorithm ................................................................................................... 12-63 MSI Reduced Quiet Zone ..................................................................................................... 12-63 Chinese 2 of 5 ............................................................................................................................ 12-64 Matrix 2 of 5 ............................................................................................................................... 12-64 Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 ................................................................................................ 12-65 Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit ...................................................................................................... 12-67 Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit ....................................................................................... 12-67 Korean 3 of 5 ............................................................................................................................. 12-68 Inverse 1D .................................................................................................................................. 12-69 GS1 DataBar .............................................................................................................................. 12-70 GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14), GS1 DataBar Truncated, GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional ............................................................................. 12-70 GS1 DataBar Limited ........................................................................................................... 12-70 GS1 DataBar Expanded, GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked ................................................ 12-71 Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN ............................................................................. 12-71 GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check .................................................................................... 12-72 GS1 DataBar Security Level ................................................................................................ 12-73 Symbology-Specific Security Features ...................................................................................... 12-74 Redundancy Level ............................................................................................................... 12-74 Security Level ....................................................................................................................... 12-76 1D Quiet Zone Level ............................................................................................................ 12-77 Intercharacter Gap Size ....................................................................................................... 12-78 Composite .................................................................................................................................. 12-78 Composite CC-C .................................................................................................................. 12-78 Composite CC-A/B ............................................................................................................... 12-79 Composite TLC-39 ............................................................................................................... 12-79 Composite Inverse ............................................................................................................... 12-80 UPC Composite Mode ......................................................................................................... 12-81 Composite Beep Mode ......................................................................................................... 12-82
xii DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes ................................................ 12-82 2D Symbologies ......................................................................................................................... 12-83
PDF417 ................................................................................................................................ 12-83 MicroPDF417 ....................................................................................................................... 12-83 Code 128 Emulation ............................................................................................................. 12-84 Data Matrix ........................................................................................................................... 12-85 GS1 Data Matrix ................................................................................................................... 12-85 Data Matrix Inverse .............................................................................................................. 12-86 Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images ...................................................................................... 12-87 Maxicode .............................................................................................................................. 12-88 QR Code .............................................................................................................................. 12-88 GS1 QR ............................................................................................................................... 12-89 MicroQR ............................................................................................................................... 12-89 Aztec .................................................................................................................................... 12-90 Aztec Inverse ....................................................................................................................... 12-91 Han Xin ................................................................................................................................ 12-92 Han Xin Inverse .................................................................................................................... 12-92 Grid Matrix ............................................................................................................................ 12-93 Grid Matrix Inverse ............................................................................................................... 12-93 Grid Matrix Mirror ................................................................................................................. 12-94 Escape Characters ............................................................................................................... 12-95 Flush Macro PDF Buffer ....................................................................................................... 12-95 Abort Macro PDF Entry ........................................................................................................ 12-95 Postal Codes .............................................................................................................................. 12-96 US Postnet ........................................................................................................................... 12-96 US Planet ............................................................................................................................. 12-96 Transmit US Postal Check Digit ........................................................................................... 12-97 UK Postal ............................................................................................................................. 12-97 Transmit UK Postal Check Digit ........................................................................................... 12-98 Japan Postal ........................................................................................................................ 12-98 Australia Post ....................................................................................................................... 12-99 Australia Post Format ......................................................................................................... 12-100 Netherlands KIX Code ...................................................................................................... 12-101 USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail ................................................................................ 12-101 UPU FICS Postal ............................................................................................................... 12-102 Mailmark ............................................................................................................................. 12-102
Chapter 13: 123Scan and Software Tools Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 13-1 123Scan ....................................................................................................................................... 13-1 Communication with 123Scan ................................................................................................ 13-2 123Scan Requirements .......................................................................................................... 13-2 123Scan Information .............................................................................................................. 13-2 Scanner SDK, Other Software Tools, and Videos ................................................................. 13-3 Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) ................................................................................................ 13-3
Table of Contents xiii
Appendix A: Standard Default Parameters
Appendix B: Country Codes Introduction ................................................................................................................................... B-1 USB and Keyboard Wedge Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) ....................................... B-2
Appendix C: Country Code Pages Introduction ................................................................................................................................... C-1 Country Code Page Defaults ........................................................................................................ C-1 Country Code Page Bar Codes .................................................................................................... C-5
Appendix D: CJK Decode Control Introduction ................................................................................................................................... D-1 CJK Control Parameters ............................................................................................................... D-1 Unicode Output Control ........................................................................................................... D-1 CJK Output Method to Windows Host ..................................................................................... D-2 Non-CJK UTF Bar Code Output .............................................................................................. D-4 Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host .......................................................................... D-6 Setting Up the Windows Registry Table for Unicode Universal Output .................................. D-6 Adding CJK IME on Windows ................................................................................................. D-6 Selecting the Simplified Chinese Input Method on the Host ................................................... D-7 Selecting the Traditional Chinese Input Method on the Host .................................................. D-8
Appendix E: Programming Reference Symbol Code Identifiers ................................................................................................................ E-1 AIM Code Identifiers ..................................................................................................................... E-3
Appendix F: Sample Bar Codes UPC/EAN ...................................................................................................................................... F-1 UPC-A, 100% ........................................................................................................................... F-1 UPC-A with 2-digit Add-on ....................................................................................................... F-1 UPC-A with 5-digit Add-on ....................................................................................................... F-2 UPC-E ...................................................................................................................................... F-2 UPC-E with 2-digit Add-on ....................................................................................................... F-2 UPC-E with 5-digit Add-on ....................................................................................................... F-3 EAN-8 ....................................................................................................................................... F-3 EAN-13, 100% ......................................................................................................................... F-3 EAN-13 with 2-digit Add-on ...................................................................................................... F-4 EAN-13 with 5-digit Add-on ...................................................................................................... F-4 Code 128 ....................................................................................................................................... F-4 GS1-128 ................................................................................................................................... F-5 Code 39 ......................................................................................................................................... F-5 Code 93 ......................................................................................................................................... F-5 Code 11 with 2 Check Digits .......................................................................................................... F-6 Interleaved 2 of 5 ........................................................................................................................... F-6 MSI with 2 Check Digits ................................................................................................................. F-6 Chinese 2 of 5 ................................................................................................................................ F-7 Matrix 2 of 5 ................................................................................................................................... F-7
xiv DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Korean 3 of 5 ................................................................................................................................. F-7 GS1 DataBar .................................................................................................................................. F-8
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14) ...................................................... F-8 GS1 DataBar Truncated ........................................................................................................... F-8 GS1 DataBar Stacked .............................................................................................................. F-8 GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional .................................................................................... F-9 GS1 DataBar Limited ............................................................................................................... F-9 GS1 DataBar Expanded ......................................................................................................... F-10 GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked ........................................................................................... F-10 2D Symbologies ........................................................................................................................... F-11 PDF417 .................................................................................................................................. F-11 Data Matrix ............................................................................................................................. F-11 GS1 Data Matrix ..................................................................................................................... F-12 Maxicode ................................................................................................................................ F-12 QR Code ................................................................................................................................ F-12 GS1 QR .................................................................................................................................. F-13 MicroQR ................................................................................................................................. F-13 Aztec ...................................................................................................................................... F-13 Han Xin .................................................................................................................................. F-14 Postal Codes ................................................................................................................................ F-14 US Postnet ............................................................................................................................. F-14 UK Postal ............................................................................................................................... F-14 Japan Post ............................................................................................................................. F-15 Australian Post ....................................................................................................................... F-15
Appendix G: Numeric Bar Codes Numeric Bar Codes ....................................................................................................................... G-1 Cancel ........................................................................................................................................... G-3
Appendix H: Alphaumeric Bar Codes Cancel ........................................................................................................................................... H-1 Alphanumeric Bar Codes .............................................................................................................. H-2
Appendix I: ASCII Character Sets
Appendix J: Communication Protocol Functionality Functionality Supported via Communication (Cable) Interface ...................................................... J-1
Appendix K: Signature Capture Code Introduction ................................................................................................................................... K-1 Code Structure .............................................................................................................................. K-1 Signature Capture Area .......................................................................................................... K-1 CapCode Pattern Structure ..................................................................................................... K-2 Start / Stop Patterns ...................................................................................................................... K-2 Dimensions ................................................................................................................................... K-3 Data Format .................................................................................................................................. K-3 Additional Capabilities ................................................................................................................... K-4 Signature Boxes ............................................................................................................................ K-4
Table of Contents xv
Appendix L: Non-Parameter Attributes Introduction .................................................................................................................................... L-1 Attributes ........................................................................................................................................ L-1 Model Number .......................................................................................................................... L-1 Serial Number .......................................................................................................................... L-1 Date of Manufacture ................................................................................................................. L-2 Date of First Programming ....................................................................................................... L-2 Configuration Filename ............................................................................................................ L-2 Beeper/LED .............................................................................................................................. L-3 Parameter Defaults .................................................................................................................. L-4 Beep on Next Bootup ............................................................................................................... L-4 Reboot ...................................................................................................................................... L-4 Host Trigger Session ................................................................................................................ L-4 Firmware Version ..................................................................................................................... L-5 ImageKit Version ...................................................................................................................... L-5 In Cradle Detect ....................................................................................................................... L-5 Charging ................................................................................................................................... L-5 Battery Charge State ................................................................................................................ L-6
Index
xvi DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
Introduction
The DS2278 Product Reference Guide provides general instructions for setting up, operating, maintaining, and troubleshooting the DS2278 series digital scanner.
Configurations
This guide includes the DS2278 series digital scanner configurations listed in Table A.
Table A: Digital Scanner and Cradle Configurations
Model Configuration
Description
DS2278-SR00006ZZWW DS2278: Area Imager, Standard Range, Cordless, Nova White
DS2278-SR00007ZZWW DS2278: Area Imager, Standard Range, Cordless, Twilight Black
DS2278-SR00007ZZK
DS2278: Area Imager, Standard Range, Cordless, Twilight Black - India and South Korea only
CR2278-PC10004WW
DS2278: Presentation Cradle, Bluetooth, Midnight Black
CR2278-PC10004K
DS2278: Presentation Cradle, Bluetooth, Midnight Black - India and South Korea only
xviii DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Related Product Line Configurations
The product configurations related to the DS2278 digital scanner are as follows.
NOTES Check Solution Builder for additional information regarding all available accessories, and the latest available configurations.
Table B: Accessories for the Digital Scanner
Product ID BTRY-DS22EAB0E-00
Spare Battery, DS2278 Family
Description
BTRY-DS22EAB0E-00K Spare Battery, DS2278 Family, India and South Korea only
25-MCXUSB-01R
Micro USB Charge Only Cable
Cables
The full list of supported cables can be found at: https://partnerportal.zebra.com/PartnerPortal/product_services/downloads_z/barcode_scanners/Universal-CableGuide-Bar-Code-Scanners.xlsx.
Chapter Descriptions
Topics covered in this guide are as follows:
· Chapter 1, Getting Started provides a product overview, unpacking instructions, and cable connection
information.
· Chapter 2, Data Capture provides beeper and LED definitions, techniques involved in scanning bar codes,
general instructions and tips about scanning, and decode ranges.
· Chapter 3, Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications provides suggested digital scanner
maintenance, troubleshooting, technical specifications, and signal descriptions (pinouts).
· Chapter 5, Radio Communications provides information about the modes of operation and features available
for wireless communication. This chapter also includes programming bar codes to configure the digital scanner.
· Chapter 4, User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options describes each user preference feature and provides
programming bar codes for selecting these features.
· Chapter 7, USB Interface describes how to set up the digital scanner with a USB host.
· Chapter 8, SSI Interface describes the system requirements of the Simple Serial Interface (SSI), which
provides a communications link between Zebra decoders and a serial host.
· Chapter 9, RS-232 Interface describes how to set up the digital scanner with an RS-232 host.
· Chapter 10, IBM 468X / 469X Interface describes how to set up the digital scanner with an IBM 468X/469X
host.
· Chapter 11, Keyboard Wedge Interface describes how to set up a keyboard wedge interface with the digital
scanner.
· Chapter 12, Symbologies describes all symbology features and provides programming bar codes for
selecting these features for the digital scanner.
About This Guide xix
· Chapter 13, 123Scan and Software Tools provides a brief description of the Zebra software tools available for
customizing digital scanner operation.
· Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters provides a table of all host devices and miscellaneous digital
scanner defaults.
· Appendix B, Country Codes provides bar codes for programming the country keyboard type for the USB
keyboard (HID) device and the keyboard wedge host.
· Appendix C, Country Code Pages provides bar codes for selecting code pages for the country keyboard
type.
· Appendix D, CJK Decode Control describes control parameters for Unicode/CJK (Chinese, Japanese,
Korean) bar code decode through USB HID Keyboard Emulation mode.
· Appendix E, Programming Reference provides a table of AIM code identifiers, ASCII character conversions,
and keyboard maps.
· Appendix F, Sample Bar Codes includes sample bar codes of various code types. · Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes includes the numeric bar codes to scan for parameters requiring specific
numeric values.
· Appendix H, Alphaumeric Bar Codes includes the alphanumeric bar codes to scan for parameters requiring
specific alphanumeric values.
· Appendix I, ASCII Character Sets provides ASCII character value tables. · Appendix J, Communication Protocol Functionality lists supported digital scanner functionality by
communication protocol.
· Appendix K, Signature Capture Code describes CapCode, a special pattern that encloses a signature area
on a document and allows the digital scanner to capture a signature.
· Appendix L, Non-Parameter Attributes defines non-parameter attributes.
Notational Conventions
The following conventions are used in this document:
· Unless stated otherwise, DS2278 refers to all configurations. · Italics are used to highlight the following:
· Chapters and sections in this and related documents · Dialog box, window and screen names · Drop-down list and list box names · Check box and radio button names
· Bold text is used to highlight the following:
· Key names on a keypad · Button names on a screen.
· bullets (·) indicate:
· Action items · Lists of alternatives · Lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential
· Sequential lists (e.g., those that describe step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered lists.
xx DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
· Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) are used to denote default parameter settings.
* Indicates Default
*Baud Rate 9600
Feature/Option
Related Documents
· DS2278 Series Quick Start Guide, p/n MN-002916-xx - provides general information for getting started with
the DS2278 digital scanner, and includes basic set up and operation instructions.
· Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide, p/n 72E-69680-xx - provides information on ADF, a means of
customizing data before transmission to a host.
· Attribute Data Dictionary, p/n 72E-149786-xx defines attribute numbers (device configuration parameters,
monitored data, and born-on information) and describes management of various attribute domains for bar code scanners and OEM engines.
For the latest version of this guide and all guides, go to: www.zebra.com/support.
Service Information
If you have a problem using the equipment, contact your facility's technical or systems support. If there is a problem with the equipment, they will contact the Zebra Support & Downloads website at: www.zebra.com/support.
When contacting support, please have the following information available:
· Serial number of the unit · Model number or product name · Software type and version number
Zebra responds to calls by e-mail, telephone or fax within the time limits set forth in service agreements.
If your problem cannot be solved by support, you may need to return your equipment for servicing and will be given specific directions. Zebra is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is not used. Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty.
If you purchased your business product from a Zebra business partner, please contact that business partner for support.
Provide Documentation Feedback
If you have comments, questions, or suggestions about this guide, send an email to EVM-Techdocs@zebra.com.
CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED
Introduction
2D bar codes have made their way to the Point of Sale (POS), appearing on everything from customer purchased items to printed and electronic coupons and loyalty cards. 1D scanners cannot capture the new 2D codes, leading to exceptions that slow down the check-out process. The DS2278 digital imager scanner scans both 1D and 2D bar codes and does not compromise performance or features. The DS2278 is easy to deploy, easy to use, and easy to manage - delivering affordable simplicity with its hands-free/hand-held design.
Figure 1-1 DS2278 Digital Scanner
1 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Interfaces
The DS2278 digital scanner cradle supports:
· USB connection to a host. The digital scanner automatically detects the USB host interface type and uses the default setting (USB Keyboard HID). If the default (*) does not meet your requirements, select another USB interface type by scanning programming bar code menus. See Appendix B, Country Codes for the interface supported international keyboards (for Windows® environment).
· Standard RS-232 connection to a host. The digital scanner automatically detects the RS-232 host interface type and uses the default setting (Standard RS-232). If the default (*) does not meet your requirements, select another RS-232 interface type by scanning programming bar code menus.
· Connection to IBM 468X/469X hosts. The digital scanner automatically detects the IBM host interface type but does not select a default setting. Scan bar code menus to set up communication of the digital scanner with the IBM terminal.
· Keyboard Wedge connection to a host. The host interprets scanned data as keystrokes. The digital scanner automatically detects the Keyboard Wedge host interface type and uses the default setting (IBM AT Notebook). If the default (*) does not meet your requirements, scan IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles on page 11-4. See Appendix B, Country Codes for the interface supported international keyboards (for Windows® environment).
· Configuration via 123Scan.
NOTE For a list of supported digital scanner functionality by communication protocol, see Appendix J, Communication Protocol Functionality.
Unpacking
Remove the digital scanner from its packing and inspect it for damage. If the digital scanner was damaged in transit, contact support. See page xx for information. KEEP THE PACKING. It is the approved shipping container; use this to return the equipment for servicing.
Getting Started 1 - 3
DS2278 Features
IMPORTANT DO NOT use the CR2278-PC cradle with any scanners other than the DS2278 digital scanner. No other cradles are compatible with the DS2278. DO NOT use the DS2278 digital scanner with any cradles other than the CR2278-PC cradle. No other scanners are compatible with the CR2278-PC cradle.
Scan Window
Trigger
Battery
Battery
Compartment Compartment
Screw
Cover
Micro USB Port
Charging Contacts
Scan LEDs Beeper
Figure 1-2 Digital Scanner Features
For detailed LED indicator information see Beeper and LED Indications on page 2-1.
Cradle Features
NOTE For detailed information about connecting, using, and mounting the CR2278-PC cradle refer to the documentation included with the cradle (CR2278-PC Presentation Cradle Quick Reference Guide, p/n MN-002917xx).
The CR2278-PC cordless presentation cradle serves as a charger, radio communication interface, and host communication interface for the DS2278 cordless digital scanner.
The presentation cradle sits on a desktop and charges the DS2278 cordless digital scanner while allowing bar code scanning in presentation mode. This cradle also provides host communication by receiving digital scanner data via a Bluetooth radio, and sending that data to the host through an attached cable. The cable provides power to the cradle from the host or optional power supply if supported.
For more information about communication between the digital scanner, cradle, and host, see Chapter 5, Radio Communications.
1 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Presentation Cradle
Pairing Bar Code (in back)
Interface Port
Charging / Communications Contacts
Rubber Feet
LED Indicator
Station Mount Threaded Brass
Screw Holes (2 - M4 x 5 mm)
Rubber Feet
Figure 1-3 CR2278-PC (Presentation Cradle) -Top and Bottom Views
Connecting the Cradle
1. Connect the appropriate cable to the power supply and an AC power source, if necessary. This ensures detection of the host and prevent inadvertently back powering the cradle from improper detection of the host.
2. Insert the interface cable into the host port. 3. Insert the interface cable into the cradle's host port. 4. Pair the digital scanner to the cradle either by inserting it in the cradle (if Pair on Contacts is enabled) or by
scanning the pairing bar code. 5. If necessary, scan the appropriate host bar code (for non-autodetected interfaces).
Changing the Host Interface
To connect to a different host, or to the same host through a different cable: 1. Unplug the interface cable from the host. 2. Unplug the power supply from the cradle, if a power supply is used. 3. Connect the interface cable to the new host, or the new interface cable to the existing host. 4. Reconnect the power supply, if required. 5. If necessary, scan the appropriate host bar code (for non-autodetected interfaces).
Getting Started 1 - 5
Using a DC Power Supply
There is no separate power jack on the cradle. The cradle can operate from host supplied power, if available. If host power is limited or not available, an external DC power supply can be used with certain host interface cables that support a power jack. An external power supply is recommended if fastest charging is required. See host interface chapters for connections.
CAUTION Always disconnect the DC power supply BEFORE disconnecting the cable to the host end or the cradle may not recognize the new host.
Charging the DS2278 Battery
When using a new battery in the DS2278, the battery may require a charge to be enabled. See Charging the DS2278 Battery on page 1-5.
NOTES
1. It is recommended to fully charge the battery before first use.
2. Charge time depends on the host type and power source.
3. The CR2278-PC passes 5V to the digital scanner which charges the battery. The charging system on the DS2278 charges the battery with as much current as possible based on the power source of the CR2278-PC. This way the input power source is never overloaded and the charge time is made as short as possible. Charge times lengthen as scanning activity increases when a DS2278 operates in presentation mode on a CR2278-PC cradle. To optimize charge performance, ensure the digital scanner is oriented to minimize accidental scan activation.
CAUTION
The battery does not charge when the temperature is above 40°C (104°F). When scanning in presentation mode at temperatures above 40°C (104°F), the battery drains until the temperature drops. When the battery charge is consumed the digital scanner stops scanning until the temperature drops and the battery has sufficient time to charge.
To avoid temperature related faults, charge the battery and operate the DS2278 in presentation mode on a CR2278-PC only within the recommended 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F) range, and ideally within 5°C to 35°C (41°F to 95°F).
Charging Using the Cradle
Insert the battery in the DS2278 and place the DS2278 in the CR2278-PC cradle (see Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle on page 1-9). The digital scanner boots and the cradle LED begins flashing green to indicate the start of normal charging.
See Beeper and LED Indications on page 2-1 for detailed LED indicator information.
1 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Charging Using the Micro USB Cable
The Micro USB cable is a charge only cable and can also be used for firmware updates. NOTE For best performance, we recommend using Zebra accessories.
Figure 1-4 Micro USB Connections
Connect the Micro USB connector to the DS2278. Connect the standard USB connector to a PC or a USB wall outlet. The digital scanner enumerates as a CDC device when the USB connector is plugged into a PC host. When charging begins, the digital scanner LED begins flashing green to indicate the start of normal charging.
Converting a CDC Device to HID
The digital scanner enumerates over USB as a CDC device, by default. If your host does not have a CDC driver, a delay occurs between connecting the digital scanner to the host and the start of charging. To eliminate the delay scan HID Device Conversion below to enumerate as an HID device. This allows the scanner to begin charging sooner.
To switch the digital scanner back to a CDC device, scan Scanner as CDC Device below.
HID Device Conversion
For instructions on downloading CDC drivers see page 7-6.
*Scanner as CDC Device
Getting Started 1 - 7
Shutting Off the Digital Scanner Battery
Scan the Battery Off bar code below to shut off the battery for long term storage or shipping. Pull the digital scanner trigger to turn on the battery.
Battery Off NOTE Always scan the Battery Off bar code in hand-held mode. Also see Battery Preservation Mode on page
4-15 for additional battery features.
Inserting the Battery
NOTES
1. It is recommended to fully charge the battery before first use. 2. The battery is initially shipped inside the digital scanner. Inserting a battery would only be
applicable for a replacement battery.
Figure 1-5 Inserting the Battery To insert the battery into the digital scanner: 1. Insert the battery into the battery compartment and push down. 2. Turn the screw on the battery compartment clockwise to tighten. Do not over torque the screw.
1 - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Removing the Battery
IMPORTANT When replacing the battery, wait at least 5 seconds after removing the old battery before inserting the new battery.
Figure 1-6 Removing the Battery from the Digital Scanner To remove the battery from the digital scanner: 1. Turn the screw on the battery compartment counterclockwise to remove the screw. 2. Remove the battery from the battery compartment. 3. To replace the battery, see Inserting the Battery on page 1-7.
Getting Started 1 - 9
Inserting the Digital Scanner in the Cradle
To insert the digital scanner in the CR2278-PC cradle: 1. Insert the digital scanner straight down into the cradle top. 2. The digital scanner naturally rotates forward to engage the digital scanner contacts with the cradle contacts
Figure 1-7 Inserting the Digital Scanner in the CR2278-PC Cradle
Sending Data to the Host Computer
The cradle receives data from the digital scanner via a wireless radio connection and transmits it to the host computer via the host cable. The digital scanner and cradle must be paired for successful wireless communication.
Pairing
Pairing registers a digital scanner to the cradle such that the digital scanner and cradle can exchange information. Pair the digital scanner to the cradle either by inserting it in the cradle (if pair on contacts is enabled), or by scanning the pairing bar code. To pair the digital scanner with the cradle, insert the digital scanner in the cradle or scan the pairing bar code. (Pairing on insertion into the cradle is enabled by default. See Pairing Methods on page 5-27.)
NOTE The pairing bar code that connects the digital scanner to a cradle is unique to each cradle. Do not scan data or parameters until pairing completes.
1 - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Lost Connection to Host
If scanned data does not transmit to the cradle's host, ensure that all cables are firmly inserted and the power supply is connected to an appropriate AC outlet, if applicable. If scanned data still does not transmit to the host, reestablish a connection with the host: 1. Disconnect the power supply from the cradle. 2. Disconnect the host interface cable from the cradle. 3. Wait three seconds. 4. Reconnect the host interface cable to the cradle. 5. Reconnect the power supply to the cradle, if the host requires. 6. Reestablish pairing with the cradle by inserting the digital scanner in the cradle or scan the pairing bar code.
(Pairing on insertion into the cradle is enabled by default. See Pairing Methods on page 5-27.)
Configuring the Digital Scanner
Use the bar codes in this manual or the 123Scan configuration program to configure the digital scanner. See Chapter 4, User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options and each host chapter for information about programming the digital scanner using bar code menus. See Chapter 13, 123Scan and Software Tools to configure the digital scanner using this configuration program. 123Scan includes a help file.
Radio Communications
The digital scanner can communicate with remote devices via Bluetooth, or by pairing with a cradle. For radio communication parameters, detailed information about operational modes, Bluetooth and pairing, see Chapter 5, Radio Communications.
Accessories
The digital scanner ships with the battery installed and the DS2278 Quick Start Guide. The following accessories must be ordered separately:
· Cradle: Can be used for charging the digital scanner battery and host communication (see Presentation Cradle on page 1-4).
· Micro USB cable: Can be used for charging the battery in the digital scanner, without a cradle. · Replacement battery for the DS2278 digital scanner, if needed. · Interface cable for the appropriate interface. · Power supply, if the interface requires one. See Related Product Line Configurations on page xviii for the full list of accessories. Also see Configurations on page xvii for product and cradle configurations. For additional items, contact a local Zebra representative or business partner.
CHAPTER 2 DATA CAPTURE
Introduction
This chapter provides beeper and LED definitions, techniques involved in scanning bar codes, general instructions and tips about scanning, and decode ranges.
This chapter provides beeper and LED definitions, techniques involved in scanning bar codes, general instructions and tips about scanning, and decode ranges.
Beeper and LED Indications
The digital scanner issues different beep sequences/patterns and an LED display to indicate status. Table 2-1 defines beep sequences/patterns and LED displays which occur during both normal scanning and while programming the digital scanner.
Digital Scanner Indications
Table 2-1 Digital Scanner Beeper and LED Indications
Beeper Sequence
LED
Indication
Standard Use
Low/medium/high beeps
Green
Power up.
Scanning
None
Green solid
Presentation Mode on.
None
No LED; green LED is turned off
Presentation Mode off.
Medium beep (or as configured)
Green flash
A bar code was successfully decoded. (See User Preferences/Miscellaneous Options Parameter Defaults on page 4-2 for programming beeper sounds.)
2 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table 2-1 Digital Scanner Beeper and LED Indications (Continued)
Beeper Sequence
LED
Indication
Low/low/low/extra low
Red
beeps
Parity error.
Four long low beeps
Red
A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol. The data is ignored. This occurs if a unit is not properly configured. Check option setting.
Five long low beeps
Red
Conversion or format error.
None
Red (fast blink)) on trigger pull
Digital scanner is disabled by a host command to the digital scanner.
High
None
A <BEL> character is received over RS-232.
None
Single green flash
Scanner dock in the cradle.
Wireless Operation
Low, high, low, high
Red
Out of batch storage memory, unable to store new bar code.
Radio Indications
Low
None
Digital scanner inserted into a cradle (may be disabled).
Low, high
Green
Bluetooth connection established.
High, low
Red
Bluetooth disconnection event.
Long low, long high
Red
Bluetooth page timeout; remote device is out of range/not powered.
Long low, long high, long low, long high
None
Bluetooth connection attempt was rejected by remote device.
None
Green (fast blink)
Bluetooth attempting reconnection.
Five high
Green (fast blink)
Bluetooth attempting reconnection (default is disable).
None
Green (fast blink)
Digital scanner placed into limited discoverable mode.
High, Low, High, Low
Green
Pairing bar code scanned.
Battery Indications
Four short high beeps
Red (stays on for 4 seconds)
Low battery indication (on trigger release).
None
Solid green
Digital scanner is charging.
None
Red (solid)
Digital scanner charging error occurred.
Battery Indications - Micro USB Only
None
Green (fast continuous blink)
Digital scanner is charging.
None
Green (solid)
Digital scanner is fully charged.
Data Capture 2 - 3
Table 2-1 Digital Scanner Beeper and LED Indications (Continued)
Beeper Sequence
LED
Indication
None
Single green flash
Initial connection.
None
Red (solid)
Charge error.
Parameter Programming
Long low/long high beeps Red
Input error, incorrect bar code or Cancel scanned, wrong entry, incorrect bar code programming sequence; remain in program mode.
High/low beeps
Green
Keyboard parameter selected. Enter value using bar code keypad.
High/low/high/low beeps
Green
Successful program exit with change in the parameter setting.
ADF Programming
Low/high/low beeps
None
ADF transmit error.
High/low beeps
Green
Number expected. Enter another digit. Add leading zeros to the front if necessary.
Low/low beeps
Green
Alpha expected. Enter another alphabetic character or scan the End of Message bar code.
High/high beeps
Green blinking
ADF criteria or action is expected. Enter another criteria or action or scan the Save Rule bar code.
High/low/low beeps
Green
All criteria or actions cleared for current rule, continue entering rule.
High/low/high/low beeps
Green (turns off blinking)
Rule saved. Rule entry mode exited.
Long low/long high beeps Red
Rule error. Entry error, wrong bar code scanned, or criteria/action list is too long for a rule. Re-enter criteria or action.
Low beep
Green
Deleted last saved rule. The current rule is left intact.
Low/high/high beeps
Green
All rules deleted.
Long low/long high/long
Red
low/long high beeps
Out of rule memory. Erase some existing rules, then try to save rule again.
Long low/long high/long low Green
beeps
(turns off blinking)
Cancel rule entry. Rule entry mode exited because of an error or the user asked to exit rule entry.
Macro PDF
Two low beeps
None
File ID error. A bar code not in the current MPDF sequence was scanned.
Two long low beeps
None
File ID error. A bar code not in the current MPDF sequence was scanned.
2 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table 2-1 Digital Scanner Beeper and LED Indications (Continued)
Beeper Sequence
LED
Indication
Three long low beeps
None
Out of memory. There is not enough buffer space to store the current MPDF symbol.
Four long low beeps
None
Bad symbology. Scanned a 1D or 2D bar code in a MPDF sequence, a duplicate MPDF label, a label in an incorrect order, or trying to transmit an empty or illegal MPDF field.
Five long low beeps
None
Flushing MPDF buffer.
Fast warble beep
None
Aborting MPDF sequence.
Low/high beeps
None
Flushing an already empty MPDF buffer.
Host Specific
USB only
Four high beeps
None
Digital scanner has not completed initialization. Wait several seconds and scan again.
RS-232 only
High/high/high/low beeps Red
RS-232 receive error.
High beep
None
A <BEL> character is received when Beep on <BEL> is enabled.
Host Controlled Digital Scanner LEDs
None
Green (slow blink)
Digital scanner connected to 123Scan.
None
Red (fast blink)
File being transferred to the digital scanner (parameters and firmware).
None
Red (slow blink)
Firmware being activated on the digital scanner, loaded into memory.
None
Green (solid)
Programming completed successfully (parameters and firmware).
None
Red (blink)
Loading the SMS package to the digital scanner.
None
Red (solid)
Error state.
Data Capture 2 - 5
Cradle LED Indications
Table 2-2 Cradle LED Indications
LED
Indication
Standard Use
Green (solid)
Power up.
Green (off, then on)
Bluetooth connection established.
Red (blink)
Transmission error.
Charging
Amber (blink)
Charging.
Green (solid)
Fully charged.
Amber (fast blink)
Charging error.
Maintenance
Red (solid)
Enter boot loader.
Red (blink)
Firmware installation.
Table 2-3 lists the conditions in which the specified host controls the System Indicator LED.
Table 2-3 Host Controlled Cradle LED Indications
LED
Indication
123Scan
Slow Blinking Green
Digital scanner connected to 123Scan.
Fast Blinking Red
File being transferred to the digital scanner (parameters and firmware).
Slow Blinking Red
Firmware activated on the digital scanner, loaded into memory.
Solid Green
Programming completed successfully (parameters and firmware).
Solid Red
Error state.
SMS
Blinking Red (Both digital scanner and cradle)
Loading the SMS package to digital scanner.
2 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Scanning
Hand-Held Scanning
1. Place the aiming pattern over the bar code..
Figure 2-1 Aiming Pattern on Bar Code - Hand-Held Mode 2. Press and hold the trigger until either:
a. The digital scanner reads the bar code. The digital scanner beeps, the LED flashes, and the scan line turns off. Or
b. The digital scanner does not read the bar code and the scan line turns off. 3. Release the trigger.
Data Capture 2 - 7 Hands-Free Scanning
The digital scanner is in hands-free (presentation) mode when it sits in the CR2278-PC cradle. During idle conditions the digital scanner operates in object detection mode, where it automatically wakes up to decode a bar code presented in the field of view. In object detection mode it is normal for the illumination LEDs to be dimly lit. To scan: 1. Ensure all connections are secure (see appropriate host chapter). 2. Present the bar code in the digital scanner field of view. 3. Upon successful decode, the digital scanner beeps and the LED flashes green. (For more information about
beeper and LED definitions, Beeper and LED Indications on page 2-1).
Figure 2-2 Aiming Pattern on Bar Code - Hands-Free Mode
2 - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Aiming with Digital Scanner Aiming
When scanning, the digital scanner projects a red scan line which allows positioning the bar code within its field of view, omnidirectionally. See Decode Ranges on page 2-8 for the proper distance to achieve between the digital scanner and a bar code.
012345
012345
Figure 2-3 Scanning Orientation with Aiming Line
The aiming line is smaller when the digital scanner is closer to the symbol and larger when it is farther from the symbol. Scan symbols with smaller bars or elements (mil size) closer to the digital scanner, and those with larger bars or elements (mil size) farther from the digital scanner. The digital scanner beeps to indicate that it successfully decoded the bar code. For more information see Table 2-1 on page 2-1.
Decode Ranges
Table 2-4 DS2278 Typical Decode Ranges
Bar Code Type
Symbol Density
Code 39
5 mil
Code 39
10 mil
Code 128
5 mil
Code 128
7.5 mil
PDF417
6.7 mil
UPC
13 mil (100%)
Data Matrix
10 mil
QR
20 mil
* Printing resolution, contrast, and ambient light dependent.
DS2278 Typical Working Ranges
Near (in/cm)
Far (in/cm)
.2 in/.5 cm
6.0 in/15.2 cm
.0 in/.0 cm
13.0 in/33.0 cm
.6 in/1.5 cm
4.0 in/10.1 cm
.0 in/.0 cm
7.0 in/17.8 cm
.8 in/2.0 cm
5.7 in/14.5 cm
.5 in/1.3 cm
14.5 in/36.8 cm
.3 in/.8 cm
6.2 in/15.7 cm
.0 in/.0 cm
11.0 in/27.9 cm
CHAPTER 3 MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING, & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Introduction
This chapter provides suggested digital scanner maintenance, troubleshooting, technical specifications, and signal descriptions (pinouts).
Maintenance
IMPORTANT Use pre-moistened wipes and do not allow liquid cleaner to pool.
Known Harmful Ingredients
The following chemicals are known to damage the plastics on Zebra scanners and should not come in contact with the device:
· Acetone · Ammonia solutions · Aqueous or alcoholic alkaline solutions · Aromatic and chlorinated hydrocarbons · Benzene · Carbolic acid · Compounds of amines or ammonia · Ethanolamine · Ethers · Isopropyl alcohol 70% (including wipes) · Ketones · TB-lysoform · Toluene · Trichloroethylene.
3 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Approved Cleaners for the Digital Scanner and Cradle
· Hydrogen peroxide · Mild dish soap.
Cleaning the Digital Scanner
Routinely cleaning the exit window is required. A dirty window may affect scanning accuracy. Do not allow any abrasive material to touch the window. To clean the digital scanner: 1. Dampen a soft cloth with one of the approved cleaning agents listed above or use pre-moistened wipes. 2. Gently wipe all surfaces, including the front, back, sides, top and bottom. Never apply liquid directly to the
digital scanner. Be careful not to let liquid pool around the digital scanner window, trigger, cable connector or any other area on the device. 3. Be sure to clean the trigger and in between the trigger and the housing (use a cotton-tipped applicator to reach tight or inaccessible areas). 4. Do not spray water or other cleaning liquids directly into the exit window. 5. Wipe the digital scanner exit window with a lens tissue or other material suitable for cleaning optical material such as eyeglasses. 6. Immediately dry the digital scanner window after cleaning with a soft non-abrasive cloth to prevent streaking. 7. Allow the unit to air dry before use. 8. Digital scanner connectors: a. Dip the cotton portion of a cotton-tipped applicator in an approved cleaner. b. Rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator back-and-forth across the connector on the Zebra
digital scanner at least 3 times. Do not leave any cotton residue on the connector. c. Use the cotton-tipped applicator dipped in alcohol to remove any grease and dirt near the connector area. d. Use a dry cotton tipped applicator and rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator back-and-forth
across the connectors at least 3 times. Do not leave any cotton residue on the connectors.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications 3 - 3
Troubleshooting
Table 3-1 Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible Causes
Possible Solutions
The aiming pattern does not appear when pressing the trigger.
No power to the digital scanner.
Incorrect host interface cable is used.
If the configuration requires a power supply, re-connect the power supply.
Connect the correct host interface cable.
Interface/power cables are loose. Re-connect cables.
Digital scanner is disabled.
For IBM 468x and USB IBM Hand-held, IBM Table-Top, and OPOS modes, enable the digital scanner via the host interface. Otherwise, see the technical person in charge of scanning.
If using RS-232 Nixdorf B mode, CTS is not asserted.
Assert CTS line.
Aiming pattern is disabled.
Enable the aiming pattern. See Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern on page 4-18.
Digital scanner emits aiming Digital scanner is not programmed pattern, but does not decode for the correct bar code type. the bar code.
Program the digital scanner to read that type of bar code. See Chapter 12, Symbologies.
Bar code symbol is unreadable.
Scan test symbols of the same bar code type to determine if the bar code is defaced.
The symbol is not completely inside aiming pattern.
Move the symbol completely within the aiming pattern.
Move the symbol completely within the field of view (AIM pattern does NOT define FOV)
Distance between digital scanner and bar code is incorrect.
Move the digital scanner closer to or further from the bar code. See Decode Ranges on page 2-8.
3 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table 3-1 Troubleshooting (Continued)
Problem
Possible Causes
Possible Solutions
Digital scanner decodes bar Digital scanner is not programmed code, but does not transmit for the correct host type. the data to the host.
Scan the appropriate host type programming bar code. See the chapter corresponding to the host type.
Interface cable is loose.
Re-connect the cable.
Cradle is not programmed for the correct host type.
Check digital scanner host parameters or edit options.
Digital scanner is not paired to host Pair digital scanner to the cradle by
connected interface.
scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle.
Cradle has lost connection to the host.
In this exact order: disconnect power supply; disconnect host cable; wait three seconds; reconnect host cable; reconnect power supply; reestablish pairing.
If the digital scanner emits four long low beeps, a transmission error occurred.
This occurs if a unit is not properly configured or connected to the wrong host type.
Set the digital scanner's communication parameters to match the host's setting.
If the digital scanner emits five low Configure the digital scanner's conversion beeps, a conversion or format error parameters properly. occurred.
If the digital scanner emits low/high/low beeps, it detected an invalid ADF rule.
Program the correct ADF rules. Refer to the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.
Host displays scanned data Digital scanner is not programmed Scan the appropriate host type
incorrectly.
to work with the host.
programming bar code.
For RS-232, set the digital scanner's communication parameters to match the host's settings.
For a Keyboard Wedge configuration, program the system for the correct keyboard type, and turn off the CAPS LOCK key.
Program the proper editing options (e.g., UPC-E to UPC-A Conversion).
Digital scanner emits short low/short medium/short high beep sequence (power-up beep sequence) more than once.
The USB bus may put the digital scanner in a state where power to the digital scanner is cycled on and off more than once.
Normal during host reset.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications 3 - 5
Table 3-1 Troubleshooting (Continued)
Problem
Possible Causes
Possible Solutions
Digital scanner emits four short high beeps during decode attempt.
Digital scanner has not completed Wait several seconds and scan again. USB initialization.
Digital scanner emits
RS-232 receive error.
Low/low/low/extra low beeps
when not in use.
Normal during host reset. Otherwise, set the digital scanner's RS-232 parity to match the host setting.
Digital scanner emits low/high beeps during programming.
Input error, incorrect bar code or Cancel bar code was scanned.
Scan the correct numeric bar codes within range for the parameter programmed.
Digital scanner emits low/high/low/high beeps during programming.
Out of host parameter storage space.
Out of memory for ADF rules.
Scan Default Parameters on page 4-5.
Reduce the number of ADF rules or the number of steps in the ADF rules.
During programming, indicates out Erase all rules and re-program with shorter of ADF parameter storage space. rules.
Digital scanner emits low/high/low beeps.
ADF transmit error.
Refer to the Advanced Data Formatting Guide for information.
Invalid ADF rule is detected.
Refer to the Advanced Data Formatting Guide for information.
Digital scanner emits a power-up beep after changing USB host type.
The USB bus re-established power Normal when changing USB host type. to the digital scanner.
Digital scanner emits one high beep when not in use.
In RS-232 mode, a <BEL> character was received and Beep on <BEL> option is enabled.
Normal when Beep on <BEL> is enabled and the digital scanner is in RS-232 mode.
Digital scanner emits frequent beeps.
No power to the digital scanner.
Check the system power. If the configuration requires a power supply, re-connect the power supply.
Incorrect host interface cable is used.
Verify that the correct host interface cable is used. If not, connect the correct host interface cable.
Interface/power cables are loose.
Check for loose cable connections and re-connect cables.
3 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table 3-1 Troubleshooting (Continued)
Problem
Possible Causes
Possible Solutions
Digital scanner emits five long low beeps after a bar code is decoded.
Conversion or format error was detected.
The digital scanner's conversion parameters are not properly configured.
Ensure the digital scanner's conversion parameters are properly configured.
Conversion or format error was detected.
An ADF rule was set up with characters that can't be sent for the host selected.
Change the ADF rule, or change to a host that can support the ADF rule.
Conversion or format error was detected.
A bar code was scanned with characters that can't be sent for that host.
Change the bar code, or change to a host that can support the bar code.
The digital scanner does not N/A connect to the tablet/PC/phone using a Bluetooth Serial connection (SPP) or while emulating a Bluetooth keyboard (HID).
1.Turn off and then turn back on the Bluetooth radio on the tablet/PC/phone. A reboot of the tablet/PC/phone may be required.
or
2. Remove the device from the PC. Scan Set Factory Defaults on page 4-5 and reconfigure the digital scanner from scratch.
When trying to pair the digital scanner and cradle by scanning the pairing barcode on the CR2278, the digital scanner emits a rejection beep.
Pairing attempt occurs after scanning Set Factory Defaults.
After scanning Set Factory Defaults either insert the digital scanner in the cradle to pair or wait five seconds before scanning the pairing barcode on the cradle.
Digital scanner LED blinks even if the pairing request was canceled from remote iOS/Android device.
If pass key entry is canceled from the tablet/phone, the digital scanner remains in the pass key entry mode for 30 seconds before timing out.
To exit pass key entry mode scan Cancel on page H-1 or scan any other barcode.
There is a delay before
N/A
illumination and aim turn on
after a trigger pull.
Increase Time Delay to Low Power Mode on page 4-12 to help with radio wake up.
Note: This could impact overall battery life.
There are firmware update N/A failures (the firmware download does not go through).
Increase Time Delay to Low Power Mode on page 4-12 to help with radio wake up.
Or
Connect the Micro USB cable to the digital scanner during the firmware download.
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications 3 - 7
NOTE If after performing these checks the digital scanner still experiences problems, contact the distributor or call support.
Report Software Version Bar Code
When contacting support, a support representative may ask you to scan the bar code below to determine the version of software installed in the digital scanner.
Report Software Version
3 - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Technical Specifications
Table 3-2 Technical Specifications
Item
Description
Physical Characteristics
Dimensions
Digital scanner 6.9 in. H x 2.6 in. W x 3.5 in. D
17.5 cm. H x 6.6 cm. W x 9.0 cm. D
Presentation Cradle 2.8 in. H x 3.7 in. W x 4.8 in. D
7.2 cm. H x 9.4 cm. W x 12.2 cm. D
Weight
Digital scanner 7.5 oz. / 214 g Presentation Cradle 5.2 oz. / 151 g
Input Voltage Range (DS2278 and Cradle)
4.5 to 5.5 VDC Host Powered; 4.5 to 5.5 VDC External Power Supply
Current (Presentation Cradle and Micro USB Cable)
500 mA (typical) Standard USB; 1100 mA (typical) BC 1.2 USB
Color
Nova White, Twilight Black
Supported Host Interfaces
USB, RS-232, Keyboard Wedge, TGCS (IBM) 46XX over RS-485
Keyboard Support User Indicators
Performance Characteristics Motion Tolerance (Hand-Held)
Supports over 90 international keyboards Direct Decode Indicator, Good Decode LEDs, Rear View LEDs, Beeper (adjustable tone and volume)
Up to 5 in./13 cm. per second for 13 mil UPC
Swipe Speed (Hands-Free)
Up to 30.0 in./76.2 cm. per second for 13 mil UPC
Aiming Pattern Illumination Imager Field of View Image Sensor Minimum Print Contrast Skew Tolerance Pitch Tolerance Roll Tolerance User Environment Operating Temperature
Linear 624nm Amber LED Two 645nm Super-Red LEDs 32.8° H x 24.8° V Nominal 640 x 480 pixels 25% minimum reflective difference +/- 65° +/- 65° 0° - 360°
Digital scanner 32.0° to 122.0° F/0.0° to 50.0° C Presentation Cradle 32.0° to 104.0° F/0.0° to 40.0° C
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications 3 - 9
Table 3-2 Technical Specifications (Continued)
Item
Description
Storage Temperature
-40.0° to 158.0° F/-40.0° to 70.0° C
Humidity
5% to 95% RH, non-condensing
Drop Specification
Designed to withstand multiple drops at 5.0 ft./1.5 m to concrete
Tumble Specification
Designed to withstand 250 tumbles in 1.5 ft./.5 m tumbler Note: 1 tumble = 0.5 cycle
Environmental Sealing
IP42
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
DS2278 and Presentation Cradle: ESD per EN61000-4-2, +/-15 KV Air, +/-8 KV Direct, +/-8 KV Indirect
Ambient Light Immunity
0 to 10,000 Foot Candles / 0 to 107,600 Lux
Radio Specifications
Bluetooth Radio
Standard Bluetooth Version 4.0 with BLE: Class 2 33 ft. (10.0m), Serial Port and HID Profiles; output power adjustable down from 2.0 dBm in 8 Steps
Battery
Battery Capacity/Battery Type
2,400 mAh Li-Ion Battery
Scans Per Battery Charge
110,000 scans at 60 scans per minute or 50,000 scans at 10 scans per minute
Note: Simulated Checkout profile of 10 scans in 10 seconds with a 50 second rest.
Operating Time Per Full Charge
84.0 hours
Note: Simulated Checkout profile of 10 scans in 10 seconds with a 50 second rest.
Charge Time (from Empty)
Standard USB BC1.2 USB
External 5V Source Micro USB
BC1.2 Micro USB
14 Hour Shift Hours 4 1 1 1.5 1
Full Charge Hours 17 5 5 7 4
Symbol Decode Capability
1D
Code 39, Code 128, Code 93, Codabar/NW7, Code 11, MSI Plessey,
UPC/EAN, Interleaved 2 of 5, Korean 3 of 5, GS1 DataBar, Base 32
(Italian Pharma)
3 - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table 3-2 2D
Technical Specifications (Continued) Item
Description
PDF417, Composite Codes, TLC-39, Aztec, DataMatrix, MaxiCode, QR Code, Micro QR, Han Xin, Postal Codes
Minimum Element Resolution Code 39 Code 128 Data Matrix QR Code
Utilities and Management 123Scan
Symbol Scanner SDK
Scanner Management Service (SMS)
4.0 mil 4.0 mil 6.0 mil 6.7 mil
Programs digital scanner parameters, upgrades firmware, provides scanned bar code data and prints reports (see Chapter 13, 123Scan and Software Tools). Generates a fully-featured scanner application, including documentation, drivers, test utilities and sample source code (www.zebra.com/ScannerSDKforWindows)
Remotely manages your Zebra scanner and queries its asset information (www.zebra.com/sms).
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, & Technical Specifications 3 - 11
Cradle Signal Descriptions
PIN 4 PIN 1
Figure 3-1 Cradle Pinouts
The signal descriptions in Table 3-3 apply to the contacts on the digital scanner and are for reference only.
Table 3-3 Signal Pinouts Pin 1 2 3 4
Function 5VDC USB_D-
USB_D+ Ground
The signal descriptions in Table 3-4 apply to the connectors on the DS2278 digital scanner and are for reference only.
Table 3-4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Signal Pin-outs
Pin
USB
RS-232
Keyboard Wedge
IBM
1
Short to Pin 6
Reserved
1M Resistor to Pin 8 2M Resistor to Pin 8
2
Power
Power
Power
Power
3
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
4
Reserved
TXD
KBD_CLK
IBM_TXD
5
D +
RXD
TERM_DATA
IBM_RXD
3 - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table 3-4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Signal Pin-outs (Continued)
Pin
USB
RS-232
Keyboard Wedge
6
Short to Pin 1
RTS
KBD_DATA
7
D -
CTS
TERM_CLK
8
Reserved
Reserved
1M Resistor to Pin 1
9
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
10 SHELL
Reserved Shield
Reserved Shield
Reserved Shield
IBM IBM_DIR Reserved 2M Resistor to Pin 1 Reserved Reserved Shield
CHAPTER 4 USER PREFERENCES & MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS
Introduction
You can program the scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes user preference features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features. The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 4-1 on page 4-2 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
If not using the default host, select the host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host. To return all features to default values, see Default Parameters on page 4-5. Throughout the programming bar
code menus, asterisks indicate (*) default values.
* Indicates default
*Enable Parameter
(1)
Feature/option Option value
4 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to set the beeper tone to high, scan the High Frequency (beeper tone) bar code listed under Beeper Tone on page 4-8. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry. Other parameters, such as Serial Response Timeout or Data Transmission Formats, require scanning several bar codes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
User Preferences/Miscellaneous Options Parameter Defaults
Table 4-1 lists defaults for user preferences parameters. Change these values in one of two ways: · Scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 4-5. · Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See Chapter 13, 123Scan and Software Tools. NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 4-1 User Preferences Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Parameter
SSI
Number 1 Number 2
Default
User Preferences
Set Default Parameter
N/A
N/A
N/A
Parameter Bar Code Scanning
236
ECh
Enable
Beep After Good Decode
56
38h
Enable
Beeper Volume
140
8Ch
High
Beeper Tone
145
91h
Medium
Beeper Duration
628
F1h 74h
Medium
Suppress Power Up Beeps
721
F1h D1h
Do Not Suppress
Direct Decode Indicator
859
F2h 5Bh
Disable
Low Power Mode
128
80h
Enable
Time Delay to Low Power Mode
146
92h
100 msec
Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Aim 729
F1h D9h
15 sec
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number
4-5 4-6 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-14
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 4 - 3
Table 4-1 User Preferences Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
SSI
Number 1 Number 2
Default
Battery Preservation Mode
1765
F8h 06h E5h Enable
Trigger Mode (or Hand-Held Trigger Mode) 138
8Ah
Standard (Level)
Hands-Free Mode
630
F1h 76h
Enable
Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern
306
F0h 32h
Enable
Hands-Free (Presentation) Decode Aiming 590 Pattern
F1h 4Eh
Enable Hands-Free (Presentation) Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF
Picklist Mode
402
F0h 92h
Disable Picklist Mode
Always
Continuous Bar Code Read
649
F1h 89h
Disable
Unique Bar Code Reporting
723
F1h D3h
Enable
Decode Session Timeout
136
88h
9.9 Seconds
Hands-Free Decode Session Timeout
400
F0 90
15
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol 137
89h
0.5 Seconds
Timeout Between Decodes, Different
144
90h
Symbols
0.1 Seconds
Decode Mirror Images (Data Matrix Only) 537
F1h 19h
Auto
Mobile Phone/Display Mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
PDF Prioritization
719
F1h CFh
Disable
PDF Prioritization Timeout
720
F1h D0h
200 ms
Decoding Illumination
298
F0h 2Ah
Enable
Illumination Brightness
669
F1h 9Dh
High
Low Light Scene Detection
810
F2h 2Ah
Dim Illumination Low
Light Assist Scene
Detection
Motion Tolerance (Hand-Held Trigger Mode 858 Only)
F2h 5Ah
Less
Product ID (PID) Type
1281
F8h 05h 01h Host Type Unique
Product ID (PID) Value
1725
F8h 06h BDh 0
ECLevel
1710
F8h 06h AEh 0
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19
4-20
4-21 4-21 4-22 4-22 4-23 4-23
4-24 4-24 4-25 4-25 4-26 4-26 4-27
4-28
4-29 4-29 4-30
4 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table 4-1 User Preferences Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
SSI
Number 1 Number 2
Default
Miscellaneous Options
Enter Key
N/A
N/A
N/A
Tab Key
N/A
N/A
N/A
Transmit Code ID Character
45
2Dh
None
Prefix Value
99, 105
63h, 69h
7013 <CR><LF>
Suffix 1 Value Suffix 2 Value
98, 104 100, 106
62h, 68h 64h, 6Ah
7013 <CR><LF>
Scan Data Transmission Format
235
EBh
Data As Is
FN1 Substitution Values
103, 109 67h, 6Dh
7013 <CR><LF>
Transmit "No Read" Message
94
5E
Disable
Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval
1118
F8h 04h 5Eh Disable
Send Versions
Software Version
N/A
N/A
N/A
Serial Number
N/A
N/A
N/A
Manufacturing Information
N/A
N/A
N/A
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number
4-31 4-31 4-32 4-33 4-33
4-34 4-36 4-37 4-38
4-39 4-39 4-39
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 4 - 5
User Preferences
Default Parameters
NOTE To pair the scanner and cradle after scanning Set Factory Defaults either insert the scanner in the cradle to pair or wait five seconds before scanning the pairing barcode on the cradle.
Scan one of the following bar codes to reset the scanner to its default settings as follows: · Restore Defaults resets all default parameters as follows: · If you configured custom default parameter values via the Write to Custom Defaults bar code, scanning the Restore Defaults bar code restores these custom values. · If you did not configure custom default parameter values, scanning the Restore Defaults bar code restores the factory default values. See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for these values. · Set Factory Defaults clears all custom default values and sets the factory default values. See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for these values.
Write to Custom Defaults
To create a set of custom defaults, select the desired parameter values in this guide, and then scan Write to Custom Defaults.
Restore Defaults Write to Custom Defaults
Set Factory Defaults
4 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Parameter Bar Code Scanning
Parameter # 236 SSI # ECh
Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether to enable or disable the decoding of parameter bar codes, including the Set Defaults bar codes.
*Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning
(1)
Disable Parameter Bar Code Scanning (0)
Beep After Good Decode
Parameter # 56 SSI # 38h
Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether or not the scanner beeps after a good decode. If you select Disable Beep After Good Decode, the beeper still operates during parameter menu scanning and to indicate error conditions.
*Enable Beep After Good Decode
(1)
Disable Beep After Good Decode (0)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 4 - 7
Beeper Volume
Parameter # 140 SSI # 8Ch
Scan one of the following bar codes to select a beeper volume.
Low Volume (2)
*High Volume
(0)
Medium Volume (1)
4 - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Beeper Tone
Parameter # 145 SSI # 91h
Scan one of the following bar codes to select a beeper tone for the good decode beep.
Disable Tone (3)
*Medium Tone
(1)
Medium to High Tone (2-tone) (4)
Low Tone (2)
High Tone (0)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 4 - 9
Beeper Duration
Parameter # 628 SSI # F1h 74h
Scan one of the following bar codes to select the duration for the good decode beep.
Short Duration (0)
*Medium Duration
(1)
Long Duration (2)
Suppress Power Up Beeps
Parameter # 721 SSI # F1h D1h
Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether or not to suppress the scanner's power-up beeps.
*Do Not Suppress Power Up Beeps
(0)
Suppress Power Up Beeps (1)
4 - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Direct Decode Indicator
Parameter # 859 SSI # F2h 5Bh
This parameter is only supported in Auto Aim and Standard (Level) Trigger Mode. Scan one of the following bar codes to select optional blinking of the illumination on a successful decode. You must continue to hold the trigger upon decode to see the illumination blink. If you release the trigger upon decode, the blinking does not occur.If you release the trigger upon decode, the blinking does not occur. This allows you to choose additional feedback for a successful decode by holding the trigger, or to continue to scan as normal.
· *Disable Direct Decode Indicator - Illumination does not blink on a successful decode. · 1 Blink - Illumination blinks once upon a successful decode. · 2 Blinks - Illumination blinks twice upon a successful decode.
*Disable Direct Decode Indicator
(0)
1 Blink (1)
2 Blinks (2)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 4 - 11
Low Power Mode
Parameter # 128 SSI # 80h
NOTE The Low Power Mode parameter only applies for non-USB and non-RS485 host interfaces, and when Trigger Mode on page 4-16 is set to Level (Standard).
Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether or not the scanner enters low power mode after a decode attempt or host communication. This applies to serial and keyboard wedge connections. If disabled, power remains on after each decode attempt. If you enable this, see Time Delay to Low Power Mode to set the inactivity time period.
*Enable Low Power Mode
(1)
Disable Low Power Mode (0)
4 - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Time Delay to Low Power Mode
Parameter # 146 SSI # 92h
NOTE This parameter only applies when Low Power Mode is enabled.
This parameter sets the time the digital scanner remains active before entering low power mode. The digital scanner wakes upon trigger pull or when the host attempts to communicate with the digital scanner.
*100 msec
(65)
500 msec (69)
1 Second (17)
3 sec (19)
2 sec (18)
4 sec (20)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 4 - 13 Time Delay to Low Power Mode (continued)
5 sec (21)
10 sec (26)
15 sec (27)
4 - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Timeout to Low Power Mode from Auto Aim
Parameter # 729 SSI # F1 D9
This parameter sets the time the scanner remains in auto aim before entering Low Power Mode.
Disabled (0)
* 15 sec (11)
1 minute (17)
5 sec (5)
30 sec (13)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 4 - 15
Battery Preservation Mode
Parameter # 1765 SSI # F8h 06h E5h
Battery Preservation Mode preserves the battery charge when the digital scanner is not being used for an extended period of time.
· Scan Enable Battery Preservation Mode to internally disconnect the battery from the digital scanner when the digital scanner is unused and not being charged for nine hours. In this mode the scanner completely turns off. This preserves the battery charge as there is no current drain on the battery and significantly extends battery shelf life. To exit Battery Preservation Mode and return to normal operation either press the digital scanner trigger or return to charging. The digital scanner cannot scan until the wake up process is complete. This takes a few seconds.
NOTES 1. Low Power Mode ((4-11) must be enabled for Battery Preservation Mode to take effect. 2. When asleep in Battery Preservation Mode, the digital scanner cannot be accessed for remote management.
· Scan Disable Battery Preservation Mode to keep the battery connected to the digital scanner at all times. This prevents the battery from being disconnected from the scanner after nine hours of sitting idle (no scanning) and not charging. When Battery Preservation Mode is disabled, substantial battery shelf life improvements are not gained as compared to when Battery Preservation Mode is enabled.
*Enable Battery Preservation Mode
(1)
Disable Battery Preservation Mode (0)
4 - 16 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Trigger Mode
Parameter # 138 SSI # 8Ah
Scan one of the following bar codes to select a trigger mode for the scanner: · Standard (Level) - A trigger press activates decode processing. Decode processing continues until the bar code decodes, you release the trigger, or the Decode Session Timeout on page 4-22 occurs. · Presentation (Blink) - The scanner activates decode processing when it detects a bar code in its field of view. After a period of non-use, the LEDs turn off until the scanner senses motion. · Auto Aim - The scanner projects the aiming pattern when lifted. A trigger press activates decode processing. After two seconds of inactivity the aiming pattern shuts off.
*Standard (Level)
(0)
Auto Aim (9)
Presentation (Blink) (7)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 4 - 17
Hands-Free Mode
Parameter # 630 SSI # F1h 76h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable hands-free mode: · Enable Hands-Free Mode - When you place the scanner in a stand, it automatically triggers when presented with a bar code. Lifting the scanner or pulling the trigger causes it to behave according to the setting of the Trigger Mode on page 4-16. · Disable Hands-Free Mode - The scanner behaves according to the setting of the Trigger Mode on page 4-16 regardless of whether it is hand-held or in stand.
*Enable Hands-Free Mode
(1)
Disable Hands-Free Mode (0)
4 - 18 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern
Parameter # 306 SSI # F0h 32h
Scan one of the following bar codes to select when to project the aiming pattern in hand-held mode: · Enable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern - This projects the aiming pattern during bar code capture. · Disable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern - This turns the aiming pattern off. · Enable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF - This projects the aiming pattern when the scanner detects a PDF bar code. NOTE With Picklist Mode on page 4-20 enabled, the decode aiming pattern flashes even if you disable the Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern.
*Enable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern
(2)
Disable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern (0)
Enable Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF (3)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 4 - 19
Hands-Free (Presentation) Decode Aiming Pattern
Parameter # 590 SSI # F1h 4Eh
Scan one of the following bar codes to select when to project the aiming pattern in hands-free mode: · Enable Hands-Free (Presentation) Decode Aiming Pattern - This projects the aiming pattern during bar code capture. · Disable Hands-Free (Presentation) Decode Aiming Pattern - This turns the aiming pattern off. · Enable Hands-Free (Presentation) Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF - This projects the aiming pattern when the scanner detects a PDF bar code. NOTE With Picklist Mode on page 4-20 enabled, the decode aiming pattern flashes even when you disable the Hands-Free Decode Aiming Pattern.
Enable Hands-Free (Presentation) Decode Aiming Pattern (1)
*Enable Hands-Free (Presentation) Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF (2)
Disable Hands-Free (Presentation) Decode Aiming Pattern (0)
4 - 20 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Picklist Mode
Parameter # 402 SSI # F0h 92h
Scan one of the following bar codes to select a Picklist Mode, which allows you to pick and decode a bar code from multiple bar codes printed close together.
NOTE Enabling Picklist Mode overrides the Disable Decode Aiming Pattern options. You can not disable the decode aiming pattern when Picklist Mode is enabled. Enabling Picklist Mode can slow decode speed and hinder the ability to decode longer bar codes.
· Enable Picklist Mode Always - Picklist Mode is always enabled. · Enable Picklist Mode in Hand-Held Mode - Picklist Mode is enabled when the scanner is out of hands-free
mode and disabled when the scanner is in presentation mode. · Enable Picklist Mode in Hands-Free Mode - Picklist Mode is enabled when the scanner is in hands-free
mode only. · Disable Picklist Mode Always - Picklist Mode is always disabled.
Enable Picklist Mode Always (2)
Enable Picklist Mode in Hand-Held Mode (1)
Enable Picklist Mode in Hands-Free Mode (3)
*Disable Picklist Mode Always (0)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 4 - 21
Continuous Bar Code Read
Parameter # 649 SSI # F1h 89h
Scan Enable Continuous Bar Code Read to report every bar code while the trigger is pressed. NOTE We strongly recommend enabling Picklist Mode on page 4-20 with this parameter. Disabling Picklist Mode can cause accidental decodes when more than one bar code is in the scanner's field of view.
Enable Continuous Bar Code Read (1)
*Disable Continuous Bar Code Read
(0)
Unique Bar Code Reporting
Parameter # 723 SSI # F1h D3h
Scan Enable Continuous Bar Code Read Uniqueness to report only unique bar codes while the trigger is pressed. This option only applies when Continuous Bar Code Read is enabled.
*Enable Unique Bar Code Reporting
(1)
Disable Unique Bar Code Reporting (0)
4 - 22 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Decode Session Timeout
Parameter # 136 SSI # 88h
This parameter sets the maximum time decode processing continues during a scan attempt. It is programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.5 to 9.9 seconds. The default timeout is 9.9 seconds. To set a Decode Session Timeout, scan the following bar code, and then scan two bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired on time. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. For example, to set a Decode Session Timeout of 0.5 seconds, scan this bar code, and then scan the 0 and 5 bar
codes. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
Decode Session Timeout
Hands-Free Decode Session Timeout
Parameter # 400 SSI # F0 90
This parameter is the hands-free compliment to the Decode Session Timeout. It configures the minimum and maximum decode processing time during a hands-free scan attempt. It only applies to the hands-free trigger mode or when a scanner is place in the gooseneck stand. The default is 15; range = 2 - 255.
The minimum decode processing time is defined as the time in which the scanner stops decoding when an object is removed or left stationary in the imaging field of view.
The maximum decode processing time is defined as the time in which the scanner stops decoding when an object is left in or is moving in the field of view.
Both the maximum and minimum times are configured using a single setting. The relationship of this setting is as follows:
Setting Value1
Minimum Time
Maximum Time
X < 25
250 ms
2.5 Seconds
X >= 25 1Setting value must be three digits.
X * 10 ms
X * 100 ms
For example, a setting value of 100 results in the scanner turning off approximately 1 second after an object is removed from the field of view or 10 seconds while an object is in the field of view moving.
The default value of the setting is 15 which results in a minimum time of 250 ms and maximum time of 2.5 seconds.
Adjust this setting based on your requirements. For example, when doing PDF prioritization, this parameter should be set to a value where the maximum time is above the PDF prioritization timeout.
To set a three digit value scan the following bar code, and then scan three bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
Hands-Free Decode Session Timeout
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 4 - 23
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol
Parameter # 137 SSI # 89h
Use this option in presentation mode or Continuous Bar Code Read mode to prevent the scanner from continuously decoding the same bar code when it is left in the scanner's field of view. The bar code must be out of the field of view for the timeout period before the scanner reads the same consecutive symbol. It is programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.0 to 9.9 seconds. The default interval is 0.5 seconds. To select the timeout between decodes for the same symbol, scan the following bar code, and then scan two bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired interval, in 0.1 second increments.
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol
Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols
Parameter # 144 SSI # 90h
Use this option in presentation mode or Continuous Bar Code Read to control the time the scanner waits before decoding a different symbol. It is programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.1 to 9.9 seconds. The default is 0.1 seconds. To select the timeout between decodes for different symbols, scan the following bar code, and then scan two bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired interval, in 0.1 second increments..
NOTE Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols cannot be greater than or equal to the Decode Session Timeout.
Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols
4 - 24 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Decode Mirror Images (Data Matrix Only) Parameter # 537
SSI # F1h 19h
Select an option for decoding mirror image Data Matrix bar codes: · Always - decode only Data Matrix bar codes that are mirror images · Never - do not decode Data Matrix bar codes that are mirror images · Auto - decode both mirrored and unmirrored Data Matrix bar codes.
Never (0)
Always (1)
*Auto
(2)
Mobile Phone/Display Mode
NOTE Reading bar codes on mobile phones does not require a special mode of operation.
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 4 - 25
PDF Prioritization
Parameter # 719 SSI # F1h CFh
Scan Enable PDF Prioritization to delay decoding certain 1D bar codes (see Note below) by the value specified in PDF Prioritization Timeout. During that time the scanner attempts to decode a PDF417 symbol (e.g., on a US driver's license), and if successful, reports this only. If it does not decode (can not find) a PDF417 symbol, it reports the 1D symbol after the timeout. The 1D symbol must be in the device's field of view for the scanner to report it. This parameter does not affect decoding other symbologies.
NOTE
The 1D Code 128 bar code lengths include the following: · 7 to 10 characters · 14 to 22 characters · 27 to 28 characters
In addition, a Code 39 bar code with the following lengths are considered to potentially be part of a US driver's license:
· 8 characters · 12 characters
Enable PDF Prioritization (1)
PDF Prioritization Timeout
*Disable PDF Prioritization
(0)
Parameter # 720 SSI # F1h D0h
If you enabled PDF Prioritization, set this timeout to indicate how long the scanner attempts to decode a PDF417 symbol before reporting the 1D bar code in the field of view.
Scan the following bar code, and then scan four bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes that specify the timeout in milliseconds. For example, to enter 400 ms, scan the following bar code, and then scan 0400. The range is 0 to 5000 ms, and the default is 200 ms.
PDF Prioritization Timeout
4 - 26 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Decoding Illumination
Parameter # 298 SSI # F0h 2Ah
Scan one of the following bar codes to determine whether the scanner turns on illumination to aid decoding. Enabling illumination usually results in superior images and better decode performance. The effectiveness of the illumination decreases as the distance to the target increases.
*Enable Decoding Illumination
(1)
Disable Decoding Illumination (0)
Illumination Brightness
Parameter # 669 SSI # F1h 9Dh
Scan one of the following bar codes to set the illumination brightness used during an active decode session. This only applies in hand-held mode (not in presentation mode).
NOTE Selecting a lower brightness level can affect decode performance.
Low Illumination Brightness (2)
*High Illumination Brightness (8)
Medium Illumination Brightness (4)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 4 - 27
Low Light Scene Detection
Parameter # 810 SSI # F2h 2Ah
Scan one of the following bar codes to allow the scanner to detect motion in dim to dark illumination environments when in presentation mode:
· No Low Light Scene Detection - The scanner attempts to detect motion as best it can with the aim pattern and illumination turned off when the scanner is idle.
· Aiming Pattern Low Light Assist Scene Detection - Illumination is off, but the aim pattern is on when the scanner is idle to assist in scene detection.
· Dim Illumination Low Light Assist Scene Detection - The aim pattern is off, but illumination is on at a dim level to assist in scene detection.
No Low Light Assist Scene Detection (0)
Aiming Pattern Low Light Assist Scene Detection (1)
*Dim Illumination Low Light Assist Scene Detection
(2)
4 - 28 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Motion Tolerance (Hand-Held Trigger Modes Only)
Parameter # 858 SSI # F2h 5Ah
Scan one of the following bar codes to select a motion tolerance option: · Less Motion Tolerance - This provides optimal decoding performance on 1D bar codes. · More Motion Tolerance - This increases motion tolerance and speeds decoding when scanning a series of 1D bar codes in rapid progression.
*Less Motion Tolerance (0)
More Motion Tolerance (1)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 4 - 29
Product ID (PID) Type
Parameter # 1281 SSI # F8h 05h 01h
Scan one of the following bar codes to define the PID value reported in USB enumeration.
*Host Type Unique (0)
Product Unique (1)
IBM Unique (2)
Product ID (PID) Value
Parameter # 1725 SSI # F8h 06h BDh
To set a Product ID value, scan Set PID Value, and then scan four numeric barcodes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the value. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error, or change a selection, scan Cancel on page G-3. The range is (0,1600-1649).
NOTE This parameter is applicable to customers using a Firmware Flash Update per the Toshiba Global Commerce Solutions (TGCS) Universal Serial Bus OEM Point-of-Sale Device Interface.
Set PID Value
4 - 30 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
ECLevel
Parameter # 1710 SSI # F8h 06h AEh
To set an ECLevel value, scan Set ECLevel, and then scan five numeric barcodes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired level. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error, or change a selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
NOTE This parameter is applicable to customers using a Firmware Flash Update per the Toshiba Global Commerce Solutions (TGCS) Universal Serial Bus OEM Point-of-Sale Device Interface. It allows a customer to define an ECLevel value in order to manage and control Flash Update operations on the 4690 operating system.
Contact the Zebra Customer Support Center online at: www.zebra.com/support for more information.
Set ECLevel
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 4 - 31
Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters
Enter Key
Scan the following bar code to add an Enter key (carriage return/line feed) after scanned data. To program other prefixes and/or suffixes, see Prefix/Suffix Values on page 4-33.
Add Enter Key (Carriage Return/Line Feed)
Tab Key
Scan the following bar code to add a Tab key after scanned data.
Tab Key
4 - 32 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Transmit Code ID Character
Parameter # 45 SSI # 2Dh
A Code ID character identifies the code type of a scanned bar code. This is useful when decoding more than one code type. In addition to any single character prefix selected, the Code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol. Select no Code ID character, a Symbol Code ID character, or an AIM Code ID character. For Code ID characters, see Symbol Code Identifiers on page E-1 and AIM Code Identifiers on page E-3.
NOTE If you enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character, and enable Transmit "No Read" Message on page 4-37, the scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message.
Symbol Code ID Character (2)
*None
(0)
AIM Code ID Character (1)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 4 - 33
Prefix/Suffix Values
Key Category Parameter # P = 99, S1 = 98, S2 = 100 SSI # P = 63h, S1 = 62h, S2 = 64h Decimal Value Parameter # P = 105, S1 = 104, S2 = 106 SSI # P = 69h, S1 = 68h, S2 = 6Ah
You can append a prefix and/or one or two suffixes to scan data for use in data editing. To set a value for a prefix or suffix, scan one of the following bar codes, and then scan four bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to that value. See Appendix I, ASCII Character Sets for the four-digit codes. When using host commands to set the prefix or suffix, set the key category parameter to 1, and then set the 3-digit decimal value. See Appendix I, ASCII Character Sets for the four-digit codes. The default prefix and suffix value is 7013 <CR><LF> (Enter key). To correct an error or change a selection,
scan Cancel on page G-3.
NOTE To use Prefix/Suffix values, first set the Scan Data Transmission Format on page 4-34.
Scan Prefix (7)
Scan Suffix 2 (8)
Scan Suffix 1 (6)
Data Format Cancel
4 - 34 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Scan Data Transmission Format
Parameter # 235 SSI # EBh
To change the scan data format, scan one of the following bar codes corresponding to the desired format.
NOTE If using this parameter do not use ADF rules to set the prefix/suffix.
To set values for the prefix and/or suffix, see Prefix/Suffix Values on page 4-33.
*Data As Is
(0)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 2> (2)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 1> (1)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 1> <SUFFIX 2> (3)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 4 - 35 Scan Data Transmission Format (continued)
<PREFIX> <DATA > (4)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 2> (6)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 1> (5)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 1> <SUFFIX 2> (7)
4 - 36 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
FN1 Substitution Values
Key Category Parameter # 103 Key Category SSI # 67h Decimal Value Parameter # 109 Decimal Value SSI # 6Dh
Keyboard wedge and USB HID keyboard hosts support a FN1 substitution feature. Enabling this substitutes any FN1 character (0x1b) in an EAN128 bar code with a value. This value defaults to 7013 <CR><LF> (Enter key). When using host commands to set the FN1 substitution value, set the key category parameter to 1, and then set the 3-digit keystroke value. See the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface for the desired value. To select a FN1 substitution value via bar code menus: 1. Scan the following bar code.
Set FN1 Substitution Value
2. Locate the keystroke desired for FN1 Substitution in the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface, and enter the 4-digit ASCII value by scanning four bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes.
To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel. To enable FN1 substitution for USB HID keyboard, scan the Enable FN1 Substitution bar code on page 4-36.
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 4 - 37
Transmit "No Read" Message
Parameter # 94 SSI # 5Eh
Scan one of the following bar codes to set an option for transmitting the No Read (NR) characters:
NOTE If you enable Transmit No Read, and also enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character for Transmit Code ID Character on page 4-32, the scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message.
NOTE This does not apply in presentation mode.
· Enable No Read - This transmits the characters NR when a successful decode does not occur before trigger release or the Decode Session Timeout expires. See Decode Session Timeout on page 4-22.
· Disable No Read - This sends nothing to the host if a symbol does not decode.
Enable No Read (1)
*Disable No Read
(0)
4 - 38 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval
Parameter # 1118 SSI # F8h 04h 5Eh
The scanner can send unsolicited heartbeat messages to assist in diagnostics. To enable this parameter and set the desired unsolicited heartbeat interval, scan one of the following time interval bar codes, or scan Set Another Interval followed by four bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired number of seconds. The range is 0 - 9999. Scan Disable Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval to turn off the feature. The heartbeat event is sent as decode data (with no decode beep) in the form of:
MOTEVTHB:nnn where nnn is a three-digit sequence number starting at 001 and wrapping after 100.
10 Seconds (10)
Set Another Interval
1 Minute (60)
*Disable Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval
(0)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options 4 - 39
Send Versions
Software Version
Scan the following bar code to send the version of software installed in the scanner.
Software Version
Serial Number
Scan the following bar code to send the scanner serial number to the host.
Serial Number
Manufacturing Information
Scan the following bar code to send the scanner manufacturing information to the host.
Manufacturing Information
4 - 40 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
CHAPTER 5 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
Introduction
This chapter provides information about the modes of operation and features available for wireless communication between the DS2278 cordless digital scanners, cradles and hosts. The chapter also includes the parameters necessary to configure the digital scanner. The digital scanner ships with the settings shown in the Radio Communication Default Table on page 5-2 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the digital scanner powers down.
NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
If not using the default host, select the host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host. To return all features to default values, scan a bar code in Default Parameters on page 4-5. Throughout the
programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default
*Enable Parameter
(1)
Feature/option Option value
5 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to enable HID Function Key Mapping, scan the Enable HID Function Key Mapping bar code listed under HID Function Key Mapping on page 5-20. The digital scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters, such as Bluetooth Friendly Name, require scanning several bar codes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Radio Communications Parameter Defaults
Table 5-1 lists the defaults for radio communication parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
· Scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 4-5.
· Configure the digital scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See Chapter 13, 123Scan and
Software Tools.
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 5-1 Radio Communication Default Table
Parameter
Parameter Number
SSI Number
Radio Communications Host Types
N/A
N/A
Bluetooth Friendly Name Discoverable Mode Wi-Fi Friendly Mode Wi-Fi Friendly Channel Exclusion Radio Output Power Link Supervision Timeout Bluetooth Radio State Bluetooth HID - Wait for Connection Apple iOS Virtual Keyboard Toggle HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay HID CAPS Lock Override
607 610 1299 N/A 1324 1698 1354 1714 1114 N/A N/A
F1h 5Fh F1h 62h F8h 05h 77h N/A F8h 05h 2Ch F8h 06h A2h F8h 05h 4Ah F8h 06h B2h F8h 04h 5Ah N/A N/A
Default
Cradle Bluetooth Classic (Cradle Host) N/A General Disable Use All Channels Medium Power Setting 5 sec On Disable Disable No Delay (0 msec) Disable
Page Number 5-4
5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-17
Radio Communications 5 - 3
Table 5-1 Radio Communication Default Table (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number
SSI Number
HID Ignore Unknown Characters
N/A
N/A
Emulate Keypad
N/A
N/A
Fast HID Keyboard
1361
F8h 05h 51h
Quick Keypad Emulation
1362
F8h 05h 52h
HID Keyboard FN1 Substitution
N/A
N/A
HID Function Key Mapping
N/A
N/A
Simulated Caps Lock
N/A
N/A
Convert Case
N/A
N/A
Reconnect Attempt Beep Feedback
559
F1h 2Fh
Reconnect Attempt Interval
558
F1h 2Eh
Auto-Reconnect
604
F1h 5Ch
Beep on Insertion Beep on <BEL> Pairing Modes Pairing on Contacts Toggle Pairing Connection Maintenance Interval Batch Mode
288 150 542 545 1322 N/A 544
20h 96 F1h 1Eh F1h 21h F8h 05h 2Ah N/A F1h 20h
Persistent Batch Storage
Bluetooth Classic and/or Low Energy (Cradle Parameter Only/Cradle Host Only)
PIN Code (Set and Store)
Variable Pin Code
1399 1355
552 608
F8h 05h 77h F8h 05h 4Bh
F1h 28h F1h 60h
Bluetooth Security Levels Save Bluetooth Connection Information
1393 1743
F8h 05h 71h F8h 06h CFh
Default
Page Number
Enable
5-18
Enable
5-18
Enable
5-19
Enable
5-19
Disable
5-20
Disable
5-20
Disable
5-21
No Case Conversion 5-21
Disable
5-22
30 sec
5-23
Auto-Reconnect
5-24
Immediately
Enable
5-25
Enable
5-25
Unlocked
5-26
Enable
5-27
Disable
5-28
15 Minutes
5-30
Normal (Do Not Batch 5-32 Data)
Disable
5-34
Classic and Low Energy 5-34
12345
5-35
Static
5-36
(Default PIN code is 12345)
Low
5-36
Enable
5-40
5 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Wireless Beeper Definitions
When the digital scanner scans the pairing bar code it issues various beep sequences indicating successful or unsuccessful operations. See Beeper and LED Indications on page 2-1 for all beep sequences and LED displays including those which occur during pairing operations.
Radio Communication Host Types
To set up the digital scanner for communication with a cradle, or to use standard Bluetooth profiles, scan the appropriate host type bar code below.
Bluetooth Classic vs. Low Energy Bluetooth
Low Energy (LE) Bluetooth has a smaller RF footprint which significantly improves Wi-Fi co-existence. However, LE Bluetooth is up to 7 times slower than Classic Bluetooth (0.27 Mbps versus 0.7-2.1 Mbps), so data intensive activities such as firmware update can take significantly longer.
Cradle
Select this host type when connecting the digital scanner to the CR2278-PC communication cradle.
NOTE The cradle pairs point-to-point (one digital scanner only).
The digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio losing communication. See Auto-Reconnect Feature on page 5-22 for more information. To establish a connection (for initial setup only): 1. Scan the Cradle-Bluetooth Classic or Cradle-Low Energy bar code. 2. Scan the pairing bar code on the cradle or place the digital scanner in the cradle.
*Cradle Bluetooth Classic
Cradle Bluetooth Low Energy
Radio Communications 5 - 5
Human Interface Device (HID) Keyboard Emulation
Select this host type when connecting to a PC/tablet/phone emulating a Bluetooth keyboard.
· HID Bluetooth Classic - Enables the host and digital scanner to communicate using the HID Keyboard
Profile over Bluetooth Classic radio. The digital scanner(s) is discoverable (Slave Mode) and also supports Master Mode. To establish a connection (initial setup only):
1. Scan the HID Bluetooth Classic bar code.
2. Connect to Master Mode or Slave Mode. · Master Mode - Scan a pairing bar code with the host device's MAC address. · Slave Mode - From the host, discover Bluetooth devices and select your digital scanner from the discovered device list.
· HID Bluetooth Low Energy (Discoverable) - Enables the host to establish a HID Keyboard Profile
connection with the digital scanner over Bluetooth Low Energy radio. The digital scanner(s) is discoverable (Slave Mode). To establish a connection (initial setup only):
1. Scan the HID Bluetooth Low Energy (Discoverable) bar code.
2. From the host discover Bluetooth devices and select your digital scanner from the discovered device list.
HID Bluetooth Classic
HID Bluetooth Low Energy (Discoverable)
5 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Simple Serial Interface (SSI)
Select this host type when connecting to a Zebra mobile device or PC/tablet/phone running a Zebra scanner SDK app.
· SSI BT Classic (Non-discoverable) - Enables communication with Zebra mobile computers. It enables the
digital scanner(s) to establish a connection with the host over Bluetooth Classic radio. The digital scanner is in non-discoverable mode (previously called Master Mode).
NOTE See Chapter 13, 123Scan and Software Tools for information about the Scanner Control App to download firmware.
To establish a connection (initial setup only): 1. Scan the SSI BT Classic (Non-discoverable) bar code.
2. Scan a pairing bar code with the host device's MAC address.
NOTE Additional steps may be necessary depending on host's Bluetooth stack.
· SSI BT Classic (Discoverable) - Enables communication with Scanner SDK for Android generated apps. It
enables the host to establish a connection with the digital scanner over Bluetooth Classic radio. The digital scanner is in discoverable (previously called Slave Mode). To establish a connection (initial setup only): 1. Scan the SSI BT Classic (Discoverable) bar code. 2. From the host, discover Bluetooth devices and select your digital scanner from your discovered device
list.
· SSI BT LE - Enables communication and firmware downloads with apps generated using Zebra Scanner
SDKs for iOS and Android. It enables the host to establish a connection with the digital scanner over a Bluetooth Low Energy radio. The digital scanner is in discoverable (Slave Mode) and also supports Master Mode. · Free Demonstration App - Download Scanner Control App for iOS from the App Store. · Free Demonstration App - Download Scanner Control App for Android from the Google Play Store.
NOTE Go to: www.zebra.com/scannersdk for additional options to develop applications that can be used for communication and firmware downloads.
Simple Serial Interface (continued)
Radio Communications 5 - 7
SSI BT Classic (Non-Discoverable) SSI BT LE
SSI BT Classic (Discoverable)
5 - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Serial Port Profile (SPP)
Select this host type when connecting to a PC/tablet/phone using a Bluetooth serial connection.
· SPP BT Classic (Non-Discoverable) - Enables the digital scanner to establish a Serial Port Profile (SPP)
connection with the host over Bluetooth Classic radio. The digital scanner is NOT discoverable (Master Mode). To establish a connection (initial setup only): 1. Scan the SPP BT Classic (Non-discoverable) bar code. 2. Scan a pairing bar code with the MAC address of the host device.
· SPP BT Classic (Discoverable) - Enables the host to establish a Serial Port Profile (SPP) connection with
the digital scanner over Bluetooth Classic radio. The digital scanner is discoverable (Slave Mode). To establish a connection (initial setup only): 1. Scan the SPP BT Classic (Discoverable) bar code. 2. From the host, discover Bluetooth devices and select your digital scanner from the discovered device
list.
SPP BT Classic (Non-Discoverable)
SPP BT Classic (Discoverable)
Bluetooth Technology Profile Support
With Bluetooth Technology Profile Support, the cradle is not required for wireless communication. The digital scanner communicates directly to the host using Bluetooth technology. The digital scanner supports the standard Bluetooth Serial Port Profile (SPP) and HID Profiles which enable the digital scanner to communicate with other Bluetooth devices that support these profiles.
· SPP - the digital scanner connects to the PC/host via Bluetooth and performs like there is a serial connection. · HID - the digital scanner connects to the PC/host via Bluetooth and performs like a keyboard.
Master/Slave Set Up
The digital scanner can be set up as a Master or Slave. When the digital scanner is set up as a Slave, it is discoverable and connectible to other devices. When the digital scanner is set up as a Master, the Bluetooth address of the remote device to which a connection is requested is required. A pairing bar code with the remote device address must be created and scanned to attempt a connection to the remote device. See the Pairing Bar Code Format on page 5-29 for information about creating a pairing bar code.
Radio Communications 5 - 9
Master
When the digital scanner is set up as a Master (SPP), it initiates the radio connection to a slave device. Initiating the connection is done by scanning a pairing bar code for the remote device (see Pairing Bar Code Format on page 5-29).
Slave
When the digital scanner is set up as a Slave device (SPP), the digital scanner accepts an incoming connection request from a remote device.
NOTE The number of digital scanners is dependent on the host capability.
Bluetooth Friendly Name
Parameter # 607 SSI # F1h 5Fh
You can set a meaningful name for the digital scanner that appears in the application during device discovery. The default name is the digital scanner name followed by its serial number, e.g., DS2278 123456789ABCDEF. Scanning Set Defaults reverts the digital scanner to this name; use custom defaults to maintain the user-programmed name through a Set Defaults operation. To set a new Bluetooth Friendly Name, scan the following bar code, then scan up to 23 characters from Appendix H, Alphaumeric Bar Codes. If the name contains less than 23 characters, Then scan End of Message in the Advanced Data Formatting Guide.
NOTE If your application allows you to set a device name, this takes precedence over the Bluetooth Friendly Name.
Bluetooth Friendly Name
5 - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Discoverable Mode Parameter # 610 SSI # F1h 62h
Select a discoverable mode based on the device initiating discovery:
· Select General Discoverable Mode when initiating connection from a PC. · Select Limited Discoverable Mode when initiating connection from a mobile device (e.g., Q), and the device
does not appear in General Discoverable Mode. Note that it can take longer to discover the device in this mode. The device remains in Limited Discoverable Mode for 30 seconds, and green LEDs flash while in this mode. It is then non-discoverable. To re-active Limited Discoverable Mode, press the trigger.
*General Discoverable Mode
(0)
Limited Discoverable Mode (1)
Radio Communications 5 - 11
Wi-Fi Friendly Mode
Digital scanners configured for Wi-Fi friendly mode behave as follows:
· The digital scanner remains in sniff mode, and exits sniff mode only during firmware update. · If any Wi-Fi channel is excluded from the hopping sequence, AFH turns off. · Digital scanner (and cradle) avoid the selected Wi-Fi channels after establishing connection.
Notes
· If using this feature, configure all digital scanners in the area for Wi-Fi friendly mode. · By default, no Wi-Fi channels are excluded. · Since Bluetooth requires a minimum of 20 channels when Wi-Fi channels 1, 6, and 11 are excluded,
a smaller number of channels are cut from the hopping sequence.
· Updating Wi-Fi friendly settings before Bluetooth connection is recommended.
Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Wi-Fi Friendly Mode, then see Wi-Fi Friendly Channel Exclusion to select any channels to exclude.
*Disable Wi-Fi Friendly Mode
Enable Wi-Fi Friendly Mode
Wi-Fi Friendly Channel Exclusion
Wi-Fi Channel Exclusion
Select the channels to exclude:
· Exclude Wi-Fi channel 1: Bluetooth channels 0-21 are excluded from hopping sequence
(2402-2423 MHz).
· Exclude Wi-Fi channel 6: Bluetooth channels 25-46 are excluded from hopping sequence
(2427 - 2448 MHz).
· Exclude Wi-Fi channel 11: Bluetooth channels 50-71 are excluded from hopping sequence
(2452 - 2473 MHz).
· Exclude Wi-Fi channel 1, 6 and 11: Bluetooth channels 2-19 (2404-2421 MHz),
26-45 (2428 - 2447 MHz) and 51-69 (2453 - 2471 MHz) are excluded from hopping sequence.
· Exclude Wi-Fi channels 1 and 6: Bluetooth channels 0-21 (2402-2423 MHz) and 25-46
(2427 - 2448 MHz) are excluded from hopping sequence.
· Exclude Wi-Fi channels 1 and 11: Bluetooth channels 0-21 (2402-2423 MHz) and 50-71
(2452 - 2473 MHz) are excluded from hopping sequence.
· Exclude Wi-Fi channel 6 and 11: Bluetooth channels 25-46 (2427 - 2448 MHz) and 50-71
(2452 - 2473 MHz) are excluded from hopping sequence.
5 - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Wi-Fi Friendly Channel Exclusion (continued)
*Use All Channels (Standard AFH)
Exclude Wi-Fi Channel 1
Exclude Wi-Fi Channel 6
Exclude Wi-Fi Channel 11
Exclude Wi-Fi Channels 1, 6, and 11
Exclude Wi-Fi Channels 1 and 6
Exclude Wi-Fi Channels 1 and 11
Exclude Wi-Fi Channels 6 and 11
Radio Communications 5 - 13
Radio Output Power
Parameter # 1324 SSI # F8h 05h 2Ch
The DS2278 uses a Class 2 Bluetooth radio (see Technical Specifications on page 3-8 for detailed radio information). The radio power can be reduced to restrict the transmission range and reduce the effect of the radio on neighboring wireless systems.
NOTE Bluetooth stack resets on power change and the device loses connection.
Scan a bar code to select the desired power mode.
* Medium Power Setting (0)
Low Power Setting (1)
5 - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Link Supervision Timeout Parameter # 1698 SSI # F8h 06h A2h
Link supervision timeout controls how quickly the digital scanner senses that the Bluetooth radio lost connection to the remote device. A lower value helps prevent data loss at the edge of the operating range while a larger value helps prevent disconnects due to the remote device not responding in time. If you are experiencing occasional disconnects and the digital scanner is able to reconnect, increase the link supervision timeout value.
NOTE The digital scanner only controls Link Supervision Timeout in Master Mode.
.5 Seconds * 5 Seconds 20 Seconds
2 Seconds 10 Seconds
Radio Communications 5 - 15
Bluetooth Radio State
Parameter # 1354 SSI # F8h 05h 4Ah
NOTE The only option to turn the radio on after it is turned off on the cradle, is through the host.
Bluetooth Radio Off
*Bluetooth Radio On
HID Host Parameters
The digital scanner supports virtual keyboard emulation for the Apple iOS, and keyboard emulation over the Bluetooth HID profile. In this mode the digital scanner can interact with Bluetooth enabled hosts supporting the HID profile as a Bluetooth keyboard. Scanned data is transmitted to the host as keystrokes.
Bluetooth HID - Wait for Connection Parameter # 1714 SSI # F8h 06h B2h
NOTE This setting applies to first time connection only, when the digital scanner connects to remote device by scanning a paring bar code.
When disabled, the digital scanner issues a connection after scanning a pairing bar code. This is the recommended setting for Android devices. When enabled, the digital scanner waits for a connection request from a remote device, after scanning a pairing bar code and initiating pairing. This is the recommended setting for Windows devices.
5 - 16 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Bluetooth HID - Wait for Connection (continued)
* Disable (0)
Enable (1)
Apple iOS Virtual Keyboard Toggle Parameter # 1114 SSI # F8h 04h 5Ah
This option works with Apple iOS devices to enable the opening and closing of the iOS virtual keyboard by double-pressing the trigger.
NOTE When this feature is enabled, the digital scanner may be incompatible with non-Apple iOS devices.
*Disable
(0)
Enable (1)
Radio Communications 5 - 17
HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay
This parameter sets the delay, in milliseconds, between emulated keystrokes. Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when the HID host requires a slower transmission of data.
*No Delay (0 msec)
Medium Delay (20 msec)
Long Delay (40 msec)
HID CAPS Lock Override
When enabled, the case of the data is preserved regardless of the state of the caps lock key. This setting is always enabled for the "Japanese, Windows (ASCII)" keyboard type and can not be disabled.
*Do Not Override Caps Lock Key
(Disable)
Override Caps Lock Key (Enable)
5 - 18 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
HID Ignore Unknown Characters
This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device and IBM device. Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character, then the digital scanner issues an error beep.
*Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters
(Enable)
Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters (Disable)
Emulate Keypad
When enabled, all characters are sent as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad. For example, ASCII A is sent as "ALT make" 0 6 5 "ALT Break."
Disable Keypad Emulation
* Enable Keypad Emulation
Fast HID Keyboard Parameter # 1361 SSI # F8h 05h 51h
This option transmits Bluetooth HID keyboard data at a faster rate.
Radio Communications 5 - 19
Fast HID Disable
*Fast HID Enable
Quick Keypad Emulation Parameter # 1362 SSI # F8h 05h 52h
NOTE This option applies only to a HID Keyboard Emulation Device which has Emulate Keypad enabled (see Emulate Keypad on page 5-18).
This parameter enables a quicker method of keypad emulation where ASCII sequences are only sent for ASCII characters not found on the keyboard.
Quick Keypad Emulation Disable
*Quick Keypad Emulation Enable
5 - 20 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
HID Keyboard FN1 Substitution
When enabled, this parameter allows replacement of any FN1 character in an EAN128 bar code with a Key Category and value chosen by the user. See FN1 Substitution Values on page 4-36 to set the Key Category and Key Value.
*Disable Keyboard FN1 Substitution
Enable Keyboard FN1 Substitution
HID Function Key Mapping
ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control-key sequences. When this parameter is enabled, the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping (see Table I-1 on page I-1). Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled.
*Disable Function Key Mapping
Enable Function Key Mapping
Radio Communications 5 - 21
Simulated Caps Lock
When enabled, the digital scanner inverts upper and lower case characters on the digital scanner bar code as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard. This inversion is done regardless of the current state of the keyboard Caps Lock state.
*Disable Simulated Caps Lock
Enable Simulated Caps Lock
Convert Case
When enabled, the digital scanner converts all bar code data to the selected case.
*No Case Conversion
Convert All to LowerCase
Convert All to Upper Case
5 - 22 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Auto-Reconnect Feature
When in SPP Master, Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation or when connected to the cradle (Cradle Host Mode), the digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio losing communication. This can happen if the digital scanner goes out of range with the remote device, or if the remote device powers down. The digital scanner tries to reconnect for the period of time specified by the Reconnect Attempt Interval setting. During that time the green LED continues to blink. If the auto-reconnect process fails due to page timeouts, the digital scanner sounds a page timeout beep (long low/long high) and enters low power mode. The auto-reconnect process can be re-started by pulling the digital scanner trigger. If the auto-reconnect process fails because the remote device rejects the connection attempt, the digital scanner sounds a connection reject beep sequence (see Wireless Beeper Definitions on page 5-4) and deletes the remote pairing address. If this happens, a pairing bar code must be scanned to attempt a new connection to the remote device.
NOTE If a bar code is scanned while the auto-reconnect sequence is in process, a transmission error beep sequence sounds and the data is not transmitted to the host. After a connection is reestablished, normal scanning operation returns. For error beep sequence definitions, see Beeper and LED Indications on page 2-1.
The digital scanner has memory available for storing a remote Bluetooth address for each Master Mode (SPP, Cradle). When switching between these modes, the digital scanner automatically tries to reconnect to the last device it was connected to in that mode.
NOTE Switching between Bluetooth host types by scanning a host type bar code (page 5-4) causes the radio to be reset. Scanning is disabled during this time. It takes several seconds for the digital scanner to re-initialize the radio at which time scanning is enabled.
Reconnect Attempt Beep Feedback
Parameter # 559 SSI # F1h 2Fh
When a digital scanner disconnects as it goes out of range, it immediately attempts to reconnect. While the digital scanner attempts to reconnect, the green LED continues to blink. If the auto-reconnect process fails, the digital scanner emits a page timeout beep (long low/long high) and stops blinking the LED. The process can be restarted by pulling the trigger. The Beep on Reconnect Attempt feature is disabled by default. When enabled, the digital scanner emits 5 short high beeps every 5 seconds while the re-connection attempt is in progress. Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Beep on Reconnect Attempt.
*Disable Beep on Reconnect Attempt
(0)
Enable Beep on Reconnect Attempt (1)
Radio Communications 5 - 23
Reconnect Attempt Interval Parameter # 558 SSI # F1h 2Eh
When a digital scanner disconnects as it goes out of range, it immediately attempts to reconnect for the default time interval of 30 seconds. This time interval can be changed to one of the options below. To set the Reconnect Attempt Interval, scan one of the bar codes below.
*Attempt to Reconnect for 30 Seconds
(6)
Attempt to Reconnect for 5 Minutes (60)
Attempt to Reconnect for 1 Minute (12)
Attempt to Reconnect for 30 Minutes (360)
Attempt to Reconnect for 1 Hour (720)
Attempt to Reconnect Indefinitely (0)
5 - 24 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Auto-Reconnect Parameter # 604 SSI # F1h 5Ch
In Bluetooth Keyboard Emulation (HID) mode, SPP Master, and when connected to the cradle (Cradle Host Mode), select a re-connect option for when the digital scanner loses its connection with a remote device:
· Auto-Reconnect on Bar Code Data: The digital scanner auto-reconnects when you scan a bar code. With
this option, a delay can occur when transmitting the first characters. The digital scanner sounds a decode beep upon bar code scan, followed by a connection, a page timeout, a rejection beep, or a transmission error beep. Select this option to optimize battery life on the digital scanner and mobile device. Note that auto-reconnect does not occur on rejection and cable unplug commands.
· Auto-Reconnect Immediately: When the digital scanner loses connection, it attempts to reconnect. If a
page timeout occurs, the digital scanner attempts reconnect on a trigger pull. Select this option if the digital scanner battery life is not an issue and you do not want a delay to occur when the first bar code is transmitted. Note that auto-reconnect does not occur on rejection and cable unplug commands.
· Disable Auto-Reconnect: When the digital scanner loses connection, you must re-establish it manually.
Auto-Reconnect on Bar Code Data (1)
*Auto-Reconnect Immediately (2)
Disable Auto-Reconnect (0)
Out of Range Indicator
An out of range indicator can be set by scanning Enable Beep on Reconnect Attempt (1) on page 5-22 and extending the time using the Reconnect Attempt Interval on page 5-23. For example, with Beep on Reconnect Attempt disabled while the digital scanner loses radio connection when it is taken out of range, the digital scanner attempts to reconnect silently during the time interval set by scanning a Reconnect Attempt Interval. When Beep on Reconnect Attempt is enabled, the digital scanner emits 5 high beeps every 5 seconds while the re-connection attempt is in progress. If the Reconnect Attempt Interval is adjusted to a longer period of time, such as 30 minutes, the digital scanner emits 5 high beeps every 5 seconds for 30 minutes providing an out of range indicator.
Radio Communications 5 - 25
Beep on Insertion
Parameter # 288 SSI # 20h
When a digital scanner is inserted into a cradle and detects power, it emits a short low beep. This feature is enabled by default. To enable or disable beeping on insertion, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable Beep on Insertion
(1)
Disable Beep on Insertion (0)
Beep on <BEL>
Parameter # 150 SSI # 96h
When this parameter is enabled, the digital scanner issues a beep when a <BEL> character is detected on the serial line. <BEL> is issued to gain a user's attention to an illegal entry or other important events.
NOTE This parameter only applies to SPP (Serial Port Profile). The RS-232 interface on the cradle has this feature when Beep on <BEL> is enabled.
*Beep on <BEL> Enable
Beep on <BEL> Disable
5 - 26 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Digital Scanner To Cradle Support
Pairing
Pairing is the process by which a digital scanner initiates communication with a cradle. To pair the digital scanner with the cradle, scan the pairing bar code. A high/low/high/low beep sequence indicates that the pairing bar code was decoded. When a connection between the cradle and digital scanner is established, a low/high beep sounds.
NOTE 1. The pairing bar code that connects the digital scanner to a cradle is unique to each cradle. 2. Do not scan data or parameters until pairing completes. 3. Only when the digital scanner is paired to the cradle, it automatically tries to reconnect to a remote device when a disconnection occurs that is due to the radio losing communication. For more information see Auto-Reconnect Feature on page 5-22.
Pairing Modes Parameter # 542 SSI # F1h 1Eh
When operating with the cradle, two modes of pairing are supported:
· Locked Point-to-Point Pairing Mode - When a cradle is paired (connected) to the digital scanner, any
attempt to connect a different digital scanner, by either scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle or by inserting it into the cradle with the pairing on contacts feature enabled (page 5-27), is rejected. The currently connected digital scanner maintains connection. In this mode, you must set a Connection Maintenance Interval on page 5-29.
· Unlocked Point-to-Point Pairing Mode - Pair (connect) a new digital scanner to a cradle at any time by
either scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle or by inserting it into the cradle with the pairing on contacts feature enabled. This unpairs the previous digital scanner from the cradle. To set the cradle pairing mode, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Unlocked Pairing Mode
(0)
Locked Pairing Mode (1)
Radio Communications 5 - 27
Lock Override
Lock Override overrides a locked digital scanner base pairing and connects a new digital scanner. To use Lock Override, scan the bar code below, followed by the pairing bar code on the cradle.
Lock Override
Pairing Methods
Parameter # 545 SSI # F1h 21h
There are two pairing methods. The default method allows the digital scanner and cradle to pair (connect) when the pairing bar code on the cradle is scanned. A second method pairs the digital scanner and cradle when the digital scanner is inserted in the cradle. To enable this feature, scan Enable Pair On Contacts below. With this feature enabled it is not necessary to scan the pairing bar code on the cradle. If the pairing is successful, a low/high connection beep sequence sounds a few seconds after the digital scanner is placed in the cradle. See Wireless Beeper Definitions on page 5-4 for other beep sequences.
To enable or disable pairing on contacts, scan the appropriate bar code below.
*Enable Pair On Contacts
(1)
Disable Pair on Contacts (0)
5 - 28 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Unpairing
NOTE When unpairing the digital scanner In Bluetooth Low Energy mode the host may issue a connection back to the digital scanner after digital scanner disconnects.
Unpair the digital scanner from the cradle or PC/host to make the cradle available for pairing with another digital scanner. Scan the bar code below to disconnect the digital scanner from its cradle/PC host.
Unpairing
Toggle Pairing Parameter # 1322 SSI # F8h 05h 2Ah
If the digital scanner is configured for Toggle Pairing, scanning the Pairing bar code disables Toggle Pairing.
*Toggle Pairing Disable
Toggle Pairing Enable
Radio Communications 5 - 29
Pairing Bar Code Format
When the digital scanner is configured as an SPP Master, you must create a pairing bar code for the remote Bluetooth device to which the digital scanner can connect. The Bluetooth address of the remote device must be known. Pairing bar codes are Code 128 bar codes and are formatted as follows:
<Fnc 3>Bxxxxxxxxxxxx where:
· B (or LNKB) is the prefix · xxxxxxxxxxxx represents the 12-character Bluetooth address.
Pairing Bar Code Example
If the remote device to which the digital scanner can connect has a Bluetooth address of 11:22:33:44:55:66, then the pairing bar code is:
Paring Bar Code Content: `B' + Bluetooth Address
B112233445566
Connection Maintenance Interval
NOTE The Connection Maintenance Interval only applies in locked pairing mode (see page 5-26).
When a digital scanner disconnects from a cradle due to a Link Supervision Timeout, the digital scanner immediately attempts to reconnect to the cradle for 30 seconds. If the auto-reconnect process fails, it can be restarted by pulling the digital scanner trigger.
To guarantee that a disconnected digital scanner can reconnect when it comes back in range, the cradle reserves the connection for that digital scanner for a period of time defined by the Connection Maintenance Interval. If the cradle is supporting the maximum three digital scanners and one digital scanner disconnects, a fourth digital scanner cannot pair to the cradle during this interval. To connect another digital scanner: either wait until the connection maintenance interval expires then scan the PAIR bar code on the cradle with the new digital scanner; or, scan Lock Override (page 5-27) with the new digital scanner then scan the PAIR bar code on the cradle.
NOTE The cradle stores the remote pairing address of each digital scanner in memory regardless of the digital scanner condition (e.g., discharged battery). When you want to change the digital scanners paired to the cradle, unpair each digital scanner currently connected to the cradle by scanning the Unpairing bar code prior and reconnect each appropriate digital scanner by scanning the PAIR bar code on the cradle.
5 - 30 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Considerations
The system administrator determines the Connection Maintenance Interval. A shorter interval allows new users to gain access to abandoned connections more quickly, but causes problems if users leave the work area for extended periods. A longer interval allows existing users to leave the work area for longer periods of time, but ties up the system for new users. To avoid this conflict, users who are going off-shift can scan the unpair bar code on page 5-28 to ignore the Connection Maintenance Interval and make the connection immediately available.
To set the Connection Maintenance Interval, scan one of the bar codes below.
*Set Interval to 15 Minutes
(0)
Set Interval to 60 Minutes (2)
Set Interval to 4 Hours (4)
Set Interval to 30 Minutes (1)
Set Interval to 2 Hours (3)
Connection Maintenance Interval (continued)
Radio Communications 5 - 31
Set Interval to 8 Hours (5)
Set Interval to 24 Hours (6)
Set Interval to Forever (7)
Batch Mode
Parameter # 544 SSI # F1h 20h
IMPORTANT
Batch mode does not apply to SPP Slave Mode.
The digital scanner supports five versions of batch mode. When the digital scanner is configured for any of the batch modes, it attempts to store bar code data (not parameter bar codes) until transmission is initialized, or the maximum number of bar codes are stored. When a bar code is saved successfully, a good decode beep sounds and the LED flashes green. If the digital scanner is unable to store a new bar code, a low/high/low/high out of memory beep sounds. (See page 2-1 for all beeper and LED definitions.)
In all modes, calculate the amount of data (number of bar codes) the digital scanner can store as follows:
Number of storable bar codes = 30,720 bytes of memory / (number of characters in the bar code + 3).
NOTE If the batch mode selection is changed while there is batched data, the new batch mode takes effect only after all the previously batched data is sent.
5 - 32 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Modes of Operation
· Normal (default) - Do not batch data. The digital scanner attempts to transmit every scanned bar code. · Out of Range Batch Mode - The digital scanner starts storing bar code data when it loses its connection to
a remote device (for example, when a user holding the digital scanner walks out of range). Data transmission is triggered by reestablishing the connection with the remote device (for example, when a user holding the digital scanner walks back into range).
· Standard Batch Mode - The digital scanner starts storing bar code data after Enter Batch Mode is scanned.
Data transmission is triggered by scanning Send Batch Data. NOTE Transmission is halted if the connection to the remote device is lost.
· Cradle Contact Batch Mode - The digital scanner starts storing bar code data when Enter Batch Mode is
scanned. Data transmission is triggered by insertion of the digital scanner into the cradle.
NOTE If the digital scanner is removed from the cradle during batch data transfer, transmission halts until the digital scanner is re-inserted in the cradle.
· Batch Only Mode - The digital scanner radio is turned off and the digital scanner stores all bar code data.
Data transmission is triggered by insertion of the digital scanner into the cradle.
NOTE If the digital scanner is removed from the cradle during batch data transfer, transmission halts until the digital scanner is re-inserted in the cradle.
The radio may be turned off as batch data is transmitted over the cradle contacts.
This mode can only be exited by scanning Normal (default) mode.
· Parameter Batch Mode - When Parameter Batch Mode is enabled, the digital scanner stores parameter bar
code data intended for the cradle. When the digital scanner is inserted into a cradle, the batched parameter data is sent over the cradle contacts, and the mode is disabled. This may be needed when the cradle and/or digital scanner is configured with its radio turned off. In all modes, transmissions are halted if the digital scanner is moved out of range. The digital scanner resumes when it is back in range. If a bar code is scanned while batch data is transmitted it is appended to the end of the batched data; parameter bar codes are not stored.
*Normal
(00h)
Out of Range Batch Mode (01h)
Batch Mode (continued)
Standard Batch Mode (02h)
Enter Batch Mode
Batch Only Mode Exit Parameter Batch Mode
Radio Communications 5 - 33
Cradle Contact Batch Mode (03h)
Send Batch Data Enter Parameter Batch Mode
5 - 34 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Persistent Batch Storage
Parameter #1399 SSI # F8h 05h 77h
When the digital scanner is configured for Persistent Batch Storage, batch data is stored in non-volatile memory and preserved even when the digital scanner is powered down. This parameter is Disabled by default.
NOTE Frequently storing batch data with this setting Enabled will shorten the life of the non-volatile memory.
* Persistent Batch Disable
(0)
Persistent Batch Enable (1)
Bluetooth Classic and/or Low Energy (Cradle Parameter Only/Cradle Host Only)
Parameter # 1355 SSI # F8h 05h 4Bh
Set up cradle to accept both Bluetooth Classic and Low Energy connections or Low Energy Only connections. NOTE All Bluetooth Classic connections must be terminated before the setting can change to Low Energy Only.
Radio Communications 5 - 35
* Bluetooth Classic and Low Energy
Low Energy Only
Bluetooth Security
The digital scanner supports Bluetooth Authentication. Authentication can be requested by either the remote device or the digital scanner.
NOTE A remote device can still request Authentication.
PIN Code Parameter # 552 SSI # F1h 28h
To set and store a PIN code (e.g., password) on the digital scanner to connect to the host: 1. Scan the Set & Store PIN Code bar code below. 2. Scan five alphanumeric programming bar codes using the alphanumeric bar codes beginning on page H-1. 3. Scan End of Message in the Advanced Data Formatting Guide. The default PIN code is 12345.
NOTE If a PIN code entry is canceled by the host, it should be canceled on the digital scanner as well. To cancel a PIN code entry on the digital scanner, scan Cancel on page H-1.
If the digital scanner communicates with a host with enabled authentication/encryption, the PIN codes on the digital scanner and host must match, otherwise pairing fails. To do this, connect the digital scanner to the host when setting the PIN code, otherwise the new PIN code only takes effect on the digital scanner.
NOTE An extended 16 character PIN code is available for additional security with Open Bluetooth (SPP and HID).
Set and Store PIN Code
5 - 36 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Variable PIN Code Parameter # 608 SSI # F1h 60h
NOTE Variable PIN Code only applies when connecting to devices that are Bluetooth 2.0 or older. Do not use Variable PIN Code parameters when connecting to the CR2278 cradle or devices with Bluetooth 2.1 or above.
When not using Bluetooth HID Keyboard Emulation, scan Static PIN Code below to avoid entering the PIN code manually. The PIN stored in memory is used. Scan the Variable PIN Code below to manually enter a PIN code with each connection. The default PIN code is the user-programmed PIN set and stored above. Typically, however, HID connections require entering a Variable PIN Code. If, when attempting connection, the application presents a text box that includes a PIN, scan the Variable PIN Code bar code, then re-attempt connection. When you hear a beep indicating the digital scanner is waiting for an alphanumeric entry, enter the provided variable PIN using the Alphaumeric Bar Codes on page H-1, then scan End of Message in the Advanced Data Formatting Guide. if the code is less than 16 characters. The digital scanner discards the variable PIN code after connection.
*Static PIN Code
(0)
Variable PIN Code (1)
Bluetooth Security Levels Parameter # 1393 SSI # F8h 05h 71h
· Low Bluetooth Security - The low security setting is designed for ease of connection with most devices.
This setting may be unacceptable to some devices. If connection fails, try re-connecting after increasing security setting on the digital scanner.
If connecting to Bluetooth 2.1 device and above, Just Works method for secure and simple pairing is used.
NOTE Data is encrypted using the Low Bluetooth security setting if connected to a Bluetooth 2.1 and above device.
· Medium Bluetooth Security - The medium security setting may require a passkey for the initial connection
to pair digital scanner and device.
Radio Communications 5 - 37
If connecting to Bluetooth 2.1 device and above, Passkey Entry method for secure and simple pairing is used.
· High Bluetooth Security - The high security setting enables Man in the Middle protection for Bluetooth 2.1
and above. Not all devices are able to support this mode.
· Legacy Bluetooth Security (Bluetooth 2.0 and below) - The legacy security setting enables authentication
and encryption for legacy pairing.
5 - 38 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Bluetooth Security Levels (continued)
*Low Bluetooth Security High Bluetooth Security
Medium Bluetooth Security Legacy Bluetooth Security
Radio Communications 5 - 39
Bluetooth Radio, Linking, and Batch Operation
The DS2278 digital scanner has a Bluetooth Class 1 radio which achieves a range of at least 135m / 440ft (open air, line of sight). The actual range you achieve is influenced by the presence of other radios, shelving and wall materials as well as which cradle is tested. The environments vary widely and often influence radio ranges.
When the digital scanner goes out of communications range to the base, it can be configured for Batch Mode (see Batch Mode on page 5-31). The digital scanner has sufficient onboard memory to store 500 bar codes of typical size (UPC/EAN).
Setting Up an iOS or Android Product To Work With The Digital Scanner
Perform the following steps on each device to establish a link.
HID Keyboard Emulation
1. On the DS2278, scan Human Interface Device (HID) Keyboard Emulation on page 5-5.
2. On an iOS/iPad/iPhone, select Settings > General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth On. Choose the DS2278 digital scanner from the list of discovered devices. A link should be established allowing scanning into any application with keyboard entry.
3. On an Android/ET1/Droid, select Settings > Wireless & networks > Bluetooth (to turn Bluetooth on, if not already on). Select Bluetooth Settings and choose the DS2278 digital scanner from the list of discovered devices. (The DS2278 digital scanner normally displays as DS2278 - xxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the serial number.)
IMPORTANT
Android devices, specifically the ET1, may require you to scan a PIN to connect. If so, a PIN displays on the device. To enter the required PIN, scan the bar code, Variable PIN Code (1) on page 5-36 then re-attempt connection. When a beep sounds, indicating the digital scanner is waiting for PIN entry, scan the PIN using the Numeric Bar Codes on page G-1. Incorrect scanned entries can be deleted by scanning Cancel on page H-1.
For more information, read the section Variable PIN Code on page 5-36.
5 - 40 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Save Bluetooth Connection Information
Parameter # 1743 SSI # F8h 06h CFh
Scan a barcode below to enable or disable the digital scanner's ability to save Bluetooth connection information.
· Enable Bluetooth Connection Information: The digital scanner saves the last connection and attempts to
reconnect after a battery swap (power cycle) if it is set to auto-reconnect. See the Auto-Reconnect Feature on page 5-22 for more information.
· Disable Bluetooth Connection Information: The digital scanner does not save the last connection to
permanent memory and does NOT reconnect after a battery swap (power cycle). Note that depending on auto-reconnect settings the digital scanner still reconnect son going out of range and other conditions where connection is lost but auto-reconnect is desired.
*Enable Bluetooth Connection Information
Disable Bluetooth Connection Information
CHAPTER 6 SIGNATURE CAPTURE PREFERENCES
Introduction
You can program the digital scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes signature capture preference features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features. The digital scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 6-1 on page 6-2 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
NOTE Although the DS2278 digital scanner supports signature capture, the quality of the image is not guaranteed. If the image does not meet your needs it is recommended that you upgrade to a DS8178 scanner.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the imager powers down.
NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan the Set Factory Defaults on page 4-5. Throughout the programming
bar code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default
*Enable Parameter
(1)
Feature/option Option value
6 - 2 DS2208 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to enable signature capture, scan the Enable Signature Capture bar code under Signature Capture on page 6-3. The digital scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry. Other parameters require scanning several bar codes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Signature Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults
Table 6-1 lists defaults for image capture preference parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
· Scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 4-5.
· Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See Chapter 13, 123Scan and Software
Tools. NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default parameters.
See Appendix K, Signature Capture Code for signature capture code information.
Table 6-1 Signature Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Signature Capture Preferences
Signature Capture
93
5Dh
Disable
Signature Capture File Format Selector
313
F0h 39h
JPEG
Signature Capture Bits per Pixel (BPP)
314
F0h 3Ah
8 BPP
Signature Capture Width
366
F4h F0h 6Eh 400
Signature Capture Height
367
F4h F0h 6Fh 100
Signature Capture JPEG Quality
421
F0h A5h
65
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number
6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-6 6-6
Signature Capture Preferences 6 - 3
Signature Capture Preferences
The parameters in this chapter control signature capture characteristics.
Signature Capture
Parameter # 93 SSI # 5Dh
A signature capture bar code is a special-purpose symbology which delineates a signature capture area in a document with a machine-readable format. The recognition pattern is variable so it can optionally provide an index to various signatures. The region inside the bar code pattern is considered the signature capture area. See Appendix K, Signature Capture Code for more information. Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Signature Capture.
Enable Signature Capture (1)
*Disable Signature Capture
(0)
6 - 4 DS2208 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Signature Capture File Format Selector
Parameter # 313 SSI # F0h 39h
Scan one of the following bar codes to select a signature file format appropriate for the system (BMP, TIFF, or JPEG). The imager stores captured signatures in the selected format.
Output File Format
Decoding a signature capture bar code de-skews the signature image and converts the image to a BMP, JPEG, or TIFF file format. The output data includes the file descriptor followed by the formatted signature image.
Table 6-2 Output File Format
File Descriptor
Output Format (1 byte)
Signature Type (1 byte)
Signature Image Size (4 bytes)
(BIG Endian)
Signature Image
JPEG - 1
1-8
BMP - 3
TIFF - 4
0x00000400
0x00010203....
BMP Signature Format (3)
TIFF Signature Format (4)
*JPEG Signature Format
(1)
Signature Capture Preferences 6 - 5
Signature Capture Bits Per Pixel
Parameter # 314 SSI # F0h 3Ah
Scan one of the following bar codes to select the number of significant bits per pixel (BPP) to use when capturing a signature:
· 1 BPP - For a black and white image. · 4 BPP - Assigns 1 of 16 levels of grey to each pixel. · 8 BPP - Assigns 1 of 256 levels of grey to each pixel.
NOTE The imager ignores these settings for JPEG file formats, which only support 8 BPP.
1 BPP (0)
*8 BPP
(2)
4 BPP (1)
6 - 6 DS2208 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Signature Capture Width
Parameter # 366 SSI # F4h F0h 6Eh
The aspect ratio of the Signature Capture Width and Signature Capture Height parameters must match that of the signature capture area. For example, a 4 x 1 inch signature capture area requires a 4 to 1 aspect ratio of width to height. To set the width of the signature capture box, scan the Signature Capture Width bar code, and then scan four bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value in the range of 001 to 640 decimal.
Signature Capture Width (Default: 400) (001 - 640 Decimal)
Signature Capture Height
Parameter # 367 SSI # F4h F0h 6Fh
To set the height of the signature capture box, scan the Signature Capture Height bar code, and then scan three bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value in the range of 001 to 480 decimal.
Signature Capture Height (Default: 100) (001 - 480 Decimal)
Signature Capture JPEG Quality
Parameter # 421 SSI # F0h A5h
Scan the JPEG Quality Value bar code, and then scan three bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value from 005 to 100, where 100 represents the highest quality image.
JPEG Quality Value (Default: 065) (5 - 100 Decimal)
CHAPTER 7 USB INTERFACE
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the cradle with a USB host. The cradle connects directly to a USB host, or a powered USB hub, which powers it. No additional power supply is required. The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 7-1 on page 7-3 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan Set Factory Defaults on page 4-5. Throughout the programming bar
code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default
*Enable Parameter
Feature/option
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to set the USB keystroke delay to medium, scan the Medium Delay (20 msec) bar code under USB Keystroke Delay on page 7-8. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several bar codes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
7 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Connecting a USB Interface
USB series A shielded connector
Interface cable
Figure 7-1 USB Connection.
NOTE If you already have existing non shielded cables from legacy products (such as the LS2208) they can be reused. However, be aware that the shielded cables provide improved ESD performance. For information about cables and cable compatibility, go to the Zebra Partner Portal at: https://partnerportal.zebra.com/PartnerPortal/product_services/downloads_z/barcode_scanners/Universa l-Cable-Guide-Bar-Code-Scanners.xlsx.
The scanner connects to USB-capable hosts including: · TGCS (IBM) terminals · AppleTM desktop and notebooks · Other network computers that support more than one keyboard.
The following operating systems support the scanner through USB:
· Windows® XP, 7, 8, 10 · MacOS 8.5 - MacOS 10.6 · IBM 4690 OS. The scanner also interfaces with other USB hosts that support USB Human Interface Devices (HID).
USB Interface 7 - 3
To set up the digital scanner:
NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 7-1 are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the digital scanner are the same.
1. Connect the modular connector of the USB interface cable to the cable interface port on the cradle. 2. Plug the series A connector in the USB host or hub, or plug the Plus Power connector in an available port of
the IBM SurePOS terminal. 3. The digital scanner automatically detects the host interface type and uses the default setting. If the default (*)
does not meet your requirements, select another USB device type by scanning the appropriate bar code from USB Device Type on page 7-5. 4. On first installation when using Windows, the software prompts to select or install the Human Interface Device driver. To install this driver, provided by Windows, click Next through all the choices and click Finished on the last choice. The digital scanner powers up during this installation. 5. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.
If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 3-3.
USB Parameter Defaults
Table 7-1 lists the defaults for USB host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
· Scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 4-5.
· Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See Chapter 13, 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 7-1 USB Interface Parameter Defaults
Parameter
USB Host Parameters USB Device Type Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking Native Firmware Update USB Keystroke Delay USB CAPS Lock Override Bar Codes With Unknown Characters USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 USB Fast HID
Default
USB Keyboard HID Enable Disable No Delay Disable Enable Disable Enable
Page Number
7-5 7-7 7-7 7-8 7-8 7-9 7-9 7-9
7 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table 7-1 USB Interface Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
USB Polling Interval Keypad Emulation Quick Keypad Emulation Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution Function Key Mapping Simulated Caps Lock Convert Case USB Static CDC CDC Beep on <BEL> TGCS (IBM) USB Direct I/O Beep TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive TGCS (IBM) USB Bar Code Configuration Directive TGCS (IBM) USB Specification Version
Default
3 msec Enable Enable Enable Disable Disable Disable None Enable Enable Honor Ignore Ignore Version 2.2
Page Number 7-11 7-13 7-13 7-14 7-14 7-15 7-15 7-16 7-16 7-17 7-17 7-18 7-18 7-19
USB Interface 7 - 5
USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type
Scan one of the following bar codes to select the USB device type. To select a country keyboard type for the USB Keyboard HID host, see Appendix B, Country Codes.
NOTES 1. When changing USB Device Types, the scanner resets and issues the standard startup beep sequences. 2. When connecting two scanners to a host, IBM does not allow selecting two of the same device type. If you
require two connections, select IBM Table-Top USB for one scanner and IBM Hand-Held USB for the second scanner. 3. Select IBM Hand-Held USB to disable data transmission when an IBM register issues a Scan Disable command. Aim, illumination, and decoding is still permitted. Select OPOS (IBM Hand-Held with Full Disable) to completely shut off the scanner when an IBM register issues a Scan Disable command, including aim, illumination, decoding, and data transmission.
*USB Keyboard HID
IBM Hand-Held USB
IBM Table-Top USB
OPOS (IBM Hand-Held with Full Disable)
7 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
USB Device Type (continued)
NOTES
1. Before scanning USB CDC Host on page 7-6, install the appropriate USB CDC Driver on the host to ensure the scanner does not stall during power up (due to a failure to enumerate USB). Go to www.zebra.com/support, Support & Downloads > Barcode Scanners > USB CDC Driver, select the appropriate Windows platform, and download either Zebra_CDC_ACM_Driver_(x64)v2.15.0004.exe (64 bit) or Zebra_CDC_ACM_Driver(x86)_v2.15.0004.exe (32 bit). To recover a stalled scanner: Install the USB CDC Driver or Unplug the USB cable and then reconnect it to add power back to the scanner. Scan HID Keyboard or another host. After power-up, hold the trigger for 10 seconds, which allows the digital scanner to power up using an alternate USB configuration. Upon power-up, scan another USB Device Type.
2. To select the Toshiba TEC device type, refer to the Toshiba TEC Programmer's Guide. 3. Select Microsoft UWP USB to communicate over a USB cable with Universal Windows Platform (UWP)
applications running on Windows 10 devices.
USB CDC Host
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging Interface
SSI over USB CDC
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) without Imaging Interface
Microsoft UWP USB (for Windows 10 devices only)
USB Interface 7 - 7
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking
After selecting a SNAPI interface as the USB device type, scan one of the following bar codes to select whether to enable or disable status handshaking.
*Enable SNAPI Status Handshaking
Disable SNAPI Status Handshaking
Native Firmware Update
Parameter # 1727 SSI # F8h 06h BFh
Some scanners that support an auxiliary scanner reboot after setting the secondary USB interface for a native firmware update in the auxiliary scanner. To support previous firmware versions residing in flatbed scanners, this parameter disables the native firmware interface. Changing this parameter requires modifying the USB descriptor, and therefore reboots the device. Scan Enable Native Firmware Update to enable the IBM flash interface.
Enable Native Firmware Update
*Disable Native Firmware Update
7 - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide USB Keystroke Delay
Scan one of the following bar codes to set the delay, in milliseconds, between emulated keystrokes. Select a longer delay for hosts that require slower data transmission.
*No Delay
Medium Delay (20 msec)
Long Delay (40 msec)
USB CAPS Lock Override
This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID device. Scan Override Caps Lock Key to preserve the case of the data regardless of the state of the Caps Lock key. This setting is always enabled for the Japanese Windows (ASCII) keyboard type and can not be disabled.
Override Caps Lock Key (Enable)
*Do Not Override Caps Lock Key
(Disable)
USB Interface 7 - 9
Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID and IBM devices. Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Scan Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to send all bar code data except for unknown characters. The scanner issues no error beeps. Scan Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters for IBM devices to prevent sending bar codes containing at least one unknown character to the host, or for USB Keyboard HID devices to send the bar code characters up to the unknown character. The scanner issues an error beep.
*Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
USB Convert Unknown to Code 39
This option applies only to the IBM Hand-Held, IBM Table-Top, and OPOS devices. Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable converting unknown bar code type data to Code 39.
Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39
*Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39
USB Fast HID
Scan Enable USB Fast HID to transmit USB HID data at a faster rate. NOTE Disable this if there are problems with transmission.
7 - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
*Enable USB Fast HID
Disable USB Fast HID
USB Interface 7 - 11
USB Polling Interval
Scan one of the following bar codes to set the polling interval, which is the rate at which data transmits between the scanner and host computer. A lower number indicates a faster data rate.
NOTE When changing the USB polling interval, the scanner restarts and issues a power-up beep sequence.
IMPORTANT Ensure the host supports the selected data rate.
1 msec
*3 msec
5 msec
2 msec 4 msec
7 - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide USB Polling Interval (continued)
6 msec 8 msec
7 msec 9 msec
10 msec
USB Interface 7 - 13 Keypad Emulation
Scan Enable Keypad Emulation to send all characters as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad. For example, ASCII A transmits as "ALT make" 0 6 5 "ALT Break".
NOTE If your keyboard type is not listed in the country code list (see Country Codes on page B-1), disable Quick Keypad Emulation on page 7-13 and enable Keypad Emulation.
*Enable Keypad Emulation
Disable Keypad Emulation
Quick Keypad Emulation
This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID device when Keypad Emulation is enabled. Scan Enable Quick Keypad Emulation for a quicker method of emulation using the numeric keypad where ASCII sequences are only sent for ASCII characters not found on the keyboard.
*Enable Quick Keypad Emulation
Disable Quick Keypad Emulation
7 - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero
Scan Enable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero to send character sequences sent over the numeric keypad as ISO characters which have a leading zero. For example, ASCII A transmits as "ALT MAKE" 0 0 6 5 "ALT BREAK".
*Enable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero
Disable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero
USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution
This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID device. Scan Enable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution to replace any FN1 character in a GS1 128 bar code with a user-selected Key Category and value. See FN1 Substitution Values on page 4-36 to set the Key Category and Key Value.
Enable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution
*Disable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution
USB Interface 7 - 15
Function Key Mapping
ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as a control-key sequence (see Table I-1 on page I-1). Scan Enable Function Key Mapping to send the keys in bold in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not have a bold equivalent remain the same regardless of whether you enable this parameter.
Enable Function Key Mapping
*Disable Function Key Mapping
Simulated Caps Lock
Scan Enable Simulated Caps Lock to invert upper and lower case characters on the bar code as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard. This inversion occurs regardless of the keyboard's Caps Lock state.
NOTE Simulated Caps Lock applies to ASCII characters only. NOTE Do not enable this if USB CAPS Lock Override on page 7-8 is enabled.
Enable Simulated Caps Lock
*Disable Simulated Caps Lock
7 - 16 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Convert Case
Scan one of the following bar codes to convert all bar code data to the selected case. NOTE Convert Case applies to ASCII characters only.
*No Case Conversion
Convert All to Upper Case
Convert All to Lower Case
USB Static CDC
When disabled, each device connected consumes another COM port (first device = COM1, second device = COM2, third device = COM3, etc.) When enabled, each device connects to the same COM port.
*Enable USB Static CDC
Disable USB Static CDC
USB Interface 7 - 17 CDC Beep on <BEL>
If you enable this parameter, the scanner issues a beep when it detects a <BEL> character in USB CDC communications. <BEL> indicates an illegal entry or other important event.
*Enable CDC Beep on <BEL>
Disable CDC Beep on <BEL>
TGCS (IBM) USB Direct I/O Beep
The host can send a direct I/O beep request to the scanner. If you select Ignore Direct I/O Beep, the scanner does not sound beeps on this command. All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if they were processed.
*Honor Direct IO Beep
Ignore Direct IO Beep
7 - 18 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive
The host can send a beeper configuration request to the scanner. Scan Ignore Beep Directive to prevent the scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if they were processed.
Honor Beep Directive
*Ignore Beep Directive
TGCS (IBM) USB Bar Code Configuration Directive
The host can enable and disable code types. Scan Ignore Bar Code Configuration Directive to prevent the scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if they were processed.
Honor Bar Code Configuration Directive
*Ignore Bar Code Configuration Directive
USB Interface 7 - 19
TGCS (IBM) USB Specification Version
Select IBM Specification Level Version 0 (Original) to send the following code types as Unknown: · Data Matrix · GS1 Data Matrix · QR Code · GS1 QR · MicroQR Code · Aztec
Select IBM Specification Level Version 2.2 to send the code types with the appropriate IBM identifiers.
IBM Specification Level Version 0 (Original)
*IBM Specification Level Version 2.2
ASCII Character Sets for USB
See Appendix I, ASCII Character Sets for the following: · ASCII Character Set (Table I-1 on page I-1) · ALT Key Character Set (Table I-2 on page I-6) · GUI Key Character Set (Table I-3 on page I-7) · F Key Character Set (Table I-5 on page I-10).
7 - 20 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
CHAPTER 8 SSI INTERFACE
Introduction
This chapter describes the system requirements of the Simple Serial Interface (SSI), which provides a communications link between Zebra decoders (e.g., scan engines, slot scanners, hand-held scanners, two-dimensional scanners, hands-free scanners, and RF base stations) and a serial host. It provides the means for the host to control the decoder or scanner.
Communication
All communication between the scanner and host occurs over the hardware interface lines using the SSI protocol. Refer to the Simple Serial Interface Programmer's Guide, p/n 72E-40451-xx, for more information on SSI. The host and the scanner exchange messages in packets. A packet is a collection of bytes framed by the proper SSI protocol formatting bytes. The maximum number of bytes per packet that the SSI protocol allows for any transaction is 257 (255 bytes + 2 byte checksum). Depending on the configuration, the scanner can send decode data as ASCII data (unpacketed), or as part of a larger message (packeted). SSI performs the following functions for the host device:
· Maintains a bi-directional interface with the scanner · Allows the host to send commands that control the scanner · Passes data from the scanner to a host device in SSI packet format or straight decode message. The SSI environment consists of a scanner, a serial cable which attaches to the host device, and if required, a power supply. SSI transmits all decode data including special formatting (e.g., AIM ID). Parameter settings can control the format of the transmitted data. The scanner can also send parameter information, product identification information, or event codes to the host. All commands sent between the scanner and host must use the format described in the SSI Message Formats section. SSI Transactions on page 8-3 describes the required sequence of messages in specific cases.
8 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table 8-1 lists all the SSI opcodes the scanner supports. The host transmits opcodes designated type H. The scanner (decoder) transmits type D opcodes, and either can transmit Host/Decoder (H/D) types.
Table 8-1 SSI Commands
Name
Type Opcode
Description
AIM_OFF
H
0xC4
Deactivate aim pattern.
AIM_ON
H
0xC5
Activate aim pattern.
BEEP
H
0xE6
Sound the beeper.
CAPABILITIES_REPLY
D
0xD4
Reply to CAPABILITIES_REQUEST; contains a list of the
capabilities and commands the decoder supports.
CAPABILITIES_REQUEST H
0xD3
Request capabilities report from the decoder.
CMD_ACK
H/D 0xD0
Positive acknowledgment of received packet.
CMD_NAK
H/D 0xD1
Negative acknowledgment of received packet.
DECODE_DATA
D
0xF3
Decode data in SSI packet format.
EVENT
D
0xF6
Event indicated by associated event code.
LED_OFF
H
0xE8
De-activate LED output.
LED_ON
H
0xE7
Activate LED output.
PARAM_DEFAULTS
H
0xC8
Set parameter default values.
PARAM_REQUEST
H
0xC7
Request values of certain parameters.
PARAM_SEND
H/D 0xC6
Send parameter values.
REPLY_REVISION
D
0xA4
Reply to REQUEST_REVISION, contains the decoder's
software/hardware configuration.
REQUEST_REVISION
H
0xA3
Request the decoder's configuration.
SCAN_DISABLE
H
0xEA
Prevent the operator from scanning bar codes.
SCAN_ENABLE
H
0xE9
Permit bar code scanning.
SLEEP
H
0xEB
Request to place the decoder into low power.
START_DECODE
H
0xE4
Tell the decoder to attempt to decode a bar code.
STOP_DECODE
H
0xE5
Tell the decoder to abort a decode attempt.
WAKEUP
H
N/A
Wake the decoder from low power mode.
For details of the SSI protocol, refer to the Simple Serial Interface Programmer's Guide.
SSI Interface 8 - 3
SSI Transactions
General Data Transactions
ACK/NAK Handshaking
If you enable ACK/NAK handshaking (the default), all packeted messages must have a CMD_ACK or CMD_NAK response, unless the command description states otherwise. Zebra recommends leaving this handshaking enabled to provide feedback to the host. Raw decode data and WAKEUP do not use ACK/NAK handshaking since they are not packeted data. Following is an example of a problem which can occur if you disable ACK/NAK handshaking:
· The host sends a PARAM_SEND message to the scanner to change the baud rate from 9600 to 19200. · The scanner cannot interpret the message. · The scanner does not implement the change the host requested. · The host assumes that the parameter change occurred and acts accordingly. · Communication is lost because the change did not occur on both sides. If you enable ACK/NAK handshaking, the following occurs: · The host sends a PARAM_SEND message. · The scanner cannot interpret the message. · The scanner CMD_NAKs the message. · The host resends the message. · The scanner receives the message successfully, responds with CMD_ACK, and implements parameter
changes.
8 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Decoded Data Transmission
The Decode Data Packet Format parameter controls how decode data is sent to the host. Set this parameter to send the data in a DECODE_DATA packet. Clear this parameter to transmit the data as raw ASCII data.
NOTE When transmitting decode data as raw ASCII data, ACK/NAK handshaking does not apply regardless of the state of the ACK/NAK handshaking parameter.
ACK/NAK Enabled and Packeted Data
The scanner sends a DECODE_DATA message after a successful decode. The scanner waits for a programmable timeout for a CMD_ACK response. If it does not receive the response, the scanner tries to send two more times before issuing a host transmission error. If the scanner receives a CMD_NAK from the host, it may attempt a retry depending on the cause field of the CMD_NAK message.
Decoder
Data is captured by decoder
(1) DECODE_DATA
(2) CMD_ACK message sent
Host
ACK/NAK Enabled and Unpacketed ASCII Data
Even if ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled, no handshaking occurs because handshaking applies only to packeted data. In this example the packeted_decode parameter is disabled.
Decoder
Data is captured by decoder
ASCII data
Host
SSI Interface 8 - 5
ACK/NAK Disabled and Packeted DECODE_DATA
In this example ACK/NAK does not occur even though packeted_decode is enabled because the ACK/NAK handshaking parameter is disabled.
Decoder
Data is captured by decoder
(1) DECODE_DATA
message sent
Host
ACK/NAK Disabled and Unpacketed ASCII Data
The decoder sends captured data to the host.
Decoder
Data is captured by decoder
(1) ASCII data sent
Host
8 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Communication Summary
RTS/CTS Lines
All communication must use RTS/CTS handshaking as described in the Simple Serial Interface Programmer's Guide, p/n 72E-40451-xx. If bypassing hardware handshaking, the host must send the WAKEUP command before all other communication or the first byte of a message can be lost during the scanner wakeup sequence. Zebra recommends not bypassing RTS/CTS hardware handshaking.
ACK/NAK Option
ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled by default and Zebra recommends leaving it enabled. Disabling this can cause communication problems, as handshaking is the only acknowledgment that a message was received correctly. ACK/NAK is not used with unpacketed decode data regardless of whether it is enabled.
Number of Data Bits
All communication with the scanner must use 8-bit data.
Serial Response Timeout
The Host Serial Response Timeout parameter determines how long to wait for a handshaking response before trying again or aborting further attempts. Set the same value for both the host and scanner.
NOTE You can temporarily change the Host Serial Response Timeout when the host takes longer to process an ACK or longer data string. Zebra does not recommend frequent permanent changes due to limited write cycles of non-volatile memory.
Retries
The host resends data twice after the initial send if the scanner does not respond with an ACK or NAK (if ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled), or response data (e.g., PARAM_SEND, REPLY_REVISION). If the scanner replies with a NAK RESEND, the host resends the data. All resent messages must have the resend bit set in the Status byte. The scanner resends data two times after the initial send if the host fails to reply with an ACK or NAK (if ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled).
Baud Rate, Stop Bits, Parity, Response Timeout, ACK/NAK Handshaking
If you use PARAM_SEND to change these serial parameters, the ACK response to the PARAM_SEND uses the previous values for these parameters. The new values then take effect for the next transaction.
Errors
The scanner issues a communication error when: · The CTS line is asserted when the scanner tries to transmit, and is still asserted on each of two successive retries · The scanner does not receive an ACK or NAK after initial transmit and two resends.
SSI Interface 8 - 7
SSI Communication Notes
· When not using hardware handshaking, space messages sufficiently apart. The host must not communicate with the scanner if the scanner is transmitting.
· When using hardware handshaking, frame each message properly with handshaking signals. Do not try to send two commands within the same handshaking frame.
· There is a permanent/temporary bit in the PARAM_SEND message. Removing power from the scanner discards temporary changes. Permanent changes are written to non-volatile memory. Frequent changes shorten the life of the non-volatile memory.
Using Time Delay to Low Power Mode with SSI
Time Delay to Low Power Mode on page 4-12 provides options to select a general time delay. To program a more specific delay value, use an SSI command according to Table 8-2.
Table 8-2 Values for Selecting Time Delay to Low Power
Value
Timeout
Value
Timeout
Value
Timeout
Value
Timeout
0x00
15 Min
0x10
1 Sec
0x20
1 Min
0x30
1 Hour
0x01
30 Min
0x11
1 Sec
0x21
1 Min
0x31
1 Hour
0x02
60 Min
0x12
2 Sec
0x22
2 Min
0x32
2 Hours
0x03
90 Min
0x13
3 Sec
0x23
3 Min
0x33
3 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x14
4 Sec
0x24
4 Min
0x34
4 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x15
5 Sec
0x25
5 Min
0x35
5 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x16
6 Sec
0x26
6 Min
0x36
6 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x17
7 Sec
0x27
7 Min
0x37
7 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x18
8 Sec
0x28
8 Min
0x38
8 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x19
9 Sec
0x29
9 Min
0x39
9 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x1A
10 Sec
0x2A
10 Min
0x3A
10 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x1B
15 Sec
0x2B
15 Min
0x3B
15 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x1C
20 Sec
0x2C
20 Min
0x3C
20 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x1D
30 Sec
0x2D
30 Min
0x3D
30 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x1E
45 Sec
0x2E
45 Min
0x3E
45 Hours
N/A
N/A
0x1F
60 Sec
0x2F
60 Min
0x3F
60 Hours
CAUTION With hardware handshaking disabled, the scanner wakes from low power mode upon receiving a character. However, the scanner does not process this character or any others it receives during the 7 ms period following wakeup. Wait at least 7 ms after wakeup to send valid characters.
8 - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Encapsulation of RSM Commands/Responses over SSI
The SSI protocol allows the host to send a command that is variable in length up to 255 bytes. Although there is a provision in the protocol to multi-packet commands from the host, the scanner does not support this. The host must fragment packets using the provisions in the RSM protocol.
Command Structure
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
0
Length (not including the checksum)
1
SSI_MGMT_COMMAND (0x80)
2
Message Source (4 - Host)
3
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
4
Payload data (see the following example)
...
Length -1
Length
2's complement checksum (MSB)
Length +1 2's complement checksum (LSB)
2 Reserved (0)
1
0
Cont'd packet Retransmit
The expected positive response is SSI_MGMT_COMMAND which can be a multi-packet response. Devices that do not support this command respond with the standard SSI_NAK.
Response Structure
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
0
Length (not including the checksum)
1
SSI_MGMT_COMMAND (0x80)
2
Message Source (0 - Decoder)
3
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
4
Payload data (see the following example)
...
Length -1
Length
2's complement checksum (MSB)
Length +1 2's complement checksum (LSB)
2 Reserved (0)
1
0
Cont'd packet Retransmit
SSI Interface 8 - 9
Example Transaction
The following example illustrates how to retrieve diagnostic information (Diagnostic Testing and Reporting (Attribute #10061) decimal) from the scanner using encapsulation of RSM commands over SSI. Before sending an RSM command, the host must send the RSM Get Packet Size command to query the packet size supported by the device.
Command from Host to Query Packet Size Supported by Device
0A 80 04 00 00 06 20 00 FF FF FD 4E Where:
· 0A 80 04 00 is encapsulation of RSM commands over SSI command header · 00 06 20 00 FF FF is RSM Get Packet Size command · FD 4E is SSI command checksum
Response from Device with Packet Size Information
0C 80 00 00 00 08 20 00 00 F0 00 F0 FD 6C Where:
· 0C 80 00 00 is encapsulation of RSM command over SSI command header · 00 08 20 00 00 F0 00 F0 is RSM Get Packet Size response · FD 6C is SSI response checksum
Command from Host to Retrieve Diagnostic Information
0C 80 04 00 00 08 02 00 27 4D 42 00 FE B0 Where:
· 0C 80 04 00 is encapsulation of RSM commands over SSI command header · 00 08 02 00 27 4D 42 00 is attribute Get command requesting attribute 10061 decimal · FE B0 is SSI command checksum
Response from Device with Diagnostic Information
21 80 00 00 00 1D 02 00 27 4D 41 01 42 00 0E 00 00 00 00 01 03 02 03 03 03 04 03 05 03 06 03 FF FF FC 15 Where:
· 21 80 00 00 00 1D 02 00 27 4D 41 01 42 00 0E 00 00 is encapsulation of RSM responses over SSI command header
· 00 00 01 03 02 03 03 03 04 03 05 03 06 03 is attribute Get response which includes diagnostic report value · FF FF is attribute Get response, packet termination · FC 15 is SSI response checksum
8 - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Setting Parameters
This section describes how to set up the scanner with an SSI host. When using SSI, program the scanner via bar code menu or SSI hosts commands. The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 8-3 on page 8-11 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary. To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan Set Factory Defaults on page 4-5. Throughout the programming bar
code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default
*Enable Parameter
(1)
Feature/option Option value
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to set the baud rate to 19,200, scan the Baud Rate 19,200 bar code under Baud Rate on page 8-12. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry. Other parameters require scanning several bar codes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
SSI Interface 8 - 11
Simple Serial Interface Parameter Defaults
Table 8-1 lists defaults for SSI host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
· Scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 4-5.
· Download data through the device's serial port using SSI. Hexadecimal parameter numbers appear in this chapter below the parameter title, and option values appear in parenthesis beneath the accompanying bar codes. Refer to the Simple Serial Interface (SSI) Programmer's Guide for detailed instructions for changing parameters using this method.
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 8-3 SSI Interface Default Table
Parameter
Parameter Number
SSI Host Parameters
Select SSI Host
N/A
Baud Rate
156
Parity
158
Check Parity
151
Stop Bits
157
Software Handshaking
159
Host RTS Line State
154
Decode Data Packet Format
238
Host Serial Response Timeout
155
Host Character Timeout
239
Multipacket Option
334
Interpacket Delay
335
Event Reporting
Decode Event
256
Boot Up Event
258
Parameter Event
259
SSI Number
Default
N/A 9Ch 9Eh 97h 9Dh 9Fh 9Ah EEh 9Bh EFh F0h 4Eh F0h 4Fh
N/A 9600 None Disable 1 ACK/NAK Low Send Raw Decode Data 2 Seconds 200 msec Option 1 0 msec
F0h 00h F0h 02h F0h 03h
Disable Disable Disable
Page Number
8-12 8-12 8-14 8-15 8-15 8-16 8-17 8-17 8-18 8-19 8-20 8-21
8-22 8-23 8-23
NOTE SSI interprets Prefix, Suffix1, and Suffix2 values listed in Table I-1 on page I-1 differently than other interfaces. SSI does not recognize key categories, only the 3-digit decimal value. The default value of 7013 is interpreted as CR only.
8 - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
SSI Host Parameters
Select SSI Host
To select SSI as the host interface, scan the following bar code.
SSI Host
Baud Rate
Parameter # 156 SSI # 9Ch
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Scan one of the following bar codes to set the scanner's baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host device or may reach it in distorted form.
*Baud Rate 9600 (6)
Baud Rate 38,400 (8)
Baud Rate 19,200 (7)
Baud Rate 57,600 (10)
Baud Rate (continued)
Baud Rate 115,200 (11)
Baud Rate 460,800 (13)
SSI Interface 8 - 13
Baud Rate 230,400 (12)
Baud Rate 921,600 (14)
8 - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Parity
Parameter # 158 SSI # 9Eh
A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Scan one of the following bar codes to select the parity type according to host device requirements:
· Odd - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains an odd number of 1 bits.
· Even - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains an even number of 1 bits.
· None - No parity bit is required.
Odd (2)
*None (0)
Even (1)
SSI Interface 8 - 15
Check Parity
Parameter # 151 SSI # 97h
Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether to check the parity of received characters. See Parity to select the type of parity.
*Do Not Check Parity (0)
Check Parity (1)
Stop Bits
Parameter # 157 SSI # 9Dh
The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. Scan one of the following bar codes to set the number of stop bits (one or two) based on the number the receiving host can accommodate.
*1 Stop Bit (1)
2 Stop Bits (2)
8 - 16 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Software Handshaking
Parameter # 159 SSI # 9Fh
This parameter offers control of data transmission in addition to the control hardware handshaking offers. Hardware handshaking is always enabled; you cannot disable it. Options:
· Disable ACK/NAK Handshaking - The scanner neither generates nor expects ACK/NAK handshaking packets.
· Enable ACK/NAK Handshaking - After transmitting data, the scanner expects either an ACK or NAK response from the host. The scanner also ACKs or NAKs messages from the host.
The scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Timeout to receive an ACK or NAK. If the scanner does not get a response in this time, it resends its data up to two times before discarding the data and declaring a transmission error.
Disable ACK/NAK (0)
*Enable ACK/NAK (1)
SSI Interface 8 - 17
Host RTS Line State
Parameter # 154 SSI # 9Ah
Scan one of the following bar codes to set the expected idle state of the Serial Host RTS line. The SSI interface is used with host applications which also implement the SSI protocol. However, you can use the scanner in a "scan-and-transmit" mode to communicate with any standard serial communication software on a host PC (see Decode Data Packet Format on page 8-17). If transmission errors occur in this mode, the host PC may be asserting hardware handshaking lines which interfere with the SSI protocol. Scan the High bar code to address this problem.
*Low (0)
High (1)
Decode Data Packet Format
Parameter # 238 SSI # EEh
Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether to transmit decoded data in raw format (unpacketed), or with the packet format defined by the serial protocol. Selecting the raw format disables ACK/NAK handshaking for decode data.
*Send Raw Decode Data (0)
Send Packeted Decode Data (1)
8 - 18 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Host Serial Response Timeout
Parameter # 155 SSI # 9Bh
Scan one of the following bar codes to specify how long the scanner waits for an ACK or NAK before resending. Also, if the scanner wants to send, and the host has already been granted permission to send, the scanner waits for the designated timeout before declaring an error.
NOTE Other values are available via SSI command.
*Low - 2 Seconds (20)
High - 7.5 Seconds (75)
Medium - 5 Seconds (50)
Maximum - 9.9 Seconds (99)
SSI Interface 8 - 19
Host Character Timeout
Parameter # 239 SSI # EFh
Scan one of the following bar codes to specify the maximum time the scanner waits between characters transmitted by the host before discarding the received data and declaring an error.
NOTE Other values are available via SSI command.
*Low - 200 msec (20)
High - 750 msec (75)
Medium - 500 msec (50)
Maximum - 990 msec (99)
8 - 20 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Multipacket Option
Parameter # 334 SSI # F0h 4Eh
Scan one of the following bar codes to control ACK/NAK handshaking for multi-packet transmissions: · Multi-Packet Option 1 - The host sends an ACK/NAK for each data packet during a multi-packet transmission. · Multi-Packet Option 2 - The scanner sends data packets continuously, with no ACK/NAK handshaking to pace the transmission. The host, if overrun, can use hardware handshaking to temporarily delay scanner transmissions. At the end of transmission, the scanner waits for a CMD_ACK or CMD_NAK. · Multi-Packet Option 3 - This is the same as option 2 with the addition of a programmable interpacket delay. See Interpacket Delay on page 8-21 to set this delay.
*Multipacket Option 1 (0)
Multipacket Option 3 (2)
Multipacket Option 2 (1)
SSI Interface 8 - 21
Interpacket Delay
Parameter # 335 SSI # F0h 4Fh
Scan one of the following bar codes to specify the interpacket delay if you selected Multipacket Option 3. NOTE Other values are available via SSI command.
*Minimum - 0 msec
(0)
Medium - 50 msec (50)
Maximum - 99 msec (99)
Low - 25 msec (25)
High - 75 msec (75)
8 - 22 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Event Reporting
The host can request the scanner to provide certain information (events) relative to scanner behavior. Scan the following bar codes to enable or disable the events listed in Table 8-4 and on the following pages.
Table 8-4 Event Codes
Event Class
Event
Code Reported
Decode Event
Non-parameter decode
0x01
Boot Up Event
System power-up
0x03
Parameter Event
Parameter entry error
0x07
Parameter stored
0x08
Defaults set (and parameter event is enabled by default)
0x0A
Number expected
0x0F
Decode Event
Parameter # 256 SSI # F0h 00h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Decode Event.
· Enable Decode Event - The scanner generates a message to the host upon a successful bar code decode. · Disable Decode Event - No notification is sent.
Enable Decode Event (1)
*Disable Decode Event (0)
SSI Interface 8 - 23
Boot Up Event
Parameter # 258 SSI # F0h 02h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Boot Up Event: · Enable Boot Up Event - The scanner generates a message to the host whenever power is applied. · Disable Boot Up Event - No notification is sent.
Enable Boot Up Event (1)
*Disable Boot Up Event (0)
Parameter Event
Parameter # 259 SSI # F0h 03h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Parameter Event: · Enable Parameter Event - The scanner generates a message to the host when one of the events specified in Table 8-4 on page 8-22 occurs. · Disable Parameter Event - No notification is sent.
Enable Parameter Event (1)
*Disable Parameter Event (0)
8 - 24 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
CHAPTER 9 RS-232 INTERFACE
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the cradle with an RS-232 host. The cradle can use the RS-232 interface to connect to point-of-sale devices, host computers, or other devices with an available RS-232 port (e.g., com port). The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 9-1 on page 9-3 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary. If your host does not appear in Table 9-2, refer to the documentation for the host device to set communication parameters to match the host.
NOTE The scanner uses TTL RS-232 signal levels, which interface with most system architectures. For system
architectures requiring RS-232C signal levels, Zebra offers different cables providing TTL-to-RS-232C conversion. Contact the Zebra Support & Downloads website for more information.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan Set Factory Defaults on page 4-5. Throughout the programming bar
code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default *Enable Parameter
Feature/option
9 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to set the baud rate to 19,200, scan the Baud Rate 19,200 bar code under Baud Rate on page 9-8. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry. Other parameters require scanning several bar codes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Connecting an RS-232 Interface
Connect the scanner directly to the host computer.
Serial port connector
to host
Interface cable Power supply
Figure 9-1 RS-232 Connection
NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors can be different than those illustrated in Figure 9-1, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.
1. Attach the modular connector of the RS-232 interface cable to the cable interface port on the cradle. 2. Connect the other end of the RS-232 interface cable to the serial port on the host. 3. If required, connect the power supply to the serial connector end of the RS-232 interface cable. Plug the power
supply into an appropriate outlet.
RS-232 Interface 9 - 3
4. The scanner automatically detects the host interface type and uses the default setting. If the default (*) does not meet your requirements, select another RS-232 host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from RS-232 Host Types on page 9-6.
5. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 3-3.
RS-232 Parameter Defaults
Table 9-1 lists defaults for RS-232 host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
· Scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 4-5.
· Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See Chapter 13, 123Scan and Software
Tools. NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 9-1 RS-232 Interface Parameter Defaults
Parameter
RS-232 Host Parameters RS-232 Host Types Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Check Receive Errors Hardware Handshaking Software Handshaking Host Serial Response Timeout RTS Line State Beep on <BEL> Intercharacter Delay Nixdorf Beep/LED Options Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
Default
Page Number
Standard
9-6
9600
9-8
None
9-9
1 Stop Bit
9-9
8-bit
9-10
Enable
9-10
None
9-11
None
9-13
2 Sec
9-15
Low RTS
9-16
Disable
9-16
0 msec
9-17
Normal Operation
9-18
Send Bar Code With Unknown 9-18 Characters
9 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
RS-232 Host Parameters
Various RS-232 hosts use their own parameter default settings. Selecting standard, ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS/JPOS, Olivetti, Omron, or Common Use Terminal Equipment (CUTE-LP/LG bar code readers) sets the defaults listed in Table 9-2.
Table 9-2 Terminal Specific RS-232
Parameter
Wincor-
Wincor-
ICL
Fujitsu
Nixdorf Nixdorf Mode Olivetti Omron
CUTE
Mode A B/OPOS/JPOS
Transmit Code ID
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Data Transmission Format
Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Data/Suffix
Data/Suffix
Prefix/Data/ Data/Suffix Prefix/Data/
Suffix
Suffix
Suffix
CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013)
CR (1013)
ETX (1002) CR (1013) CR (1013) ETX (1003)
Baud Rate
9600
9600
9600
9600
9600
9600
9600
Parity
Even
None
Odd
Odd
Even
None
Even
Hardware Handshaking
RTS/CTS Option 3
None
RTS/CTS Option 3
RTS/CTS Option 3
None
None
None
Software Handshaking
None
None
None
None
ACK/NAK None
None
Serial Response Timeout
9.9 Sec.
2 Sec.
None
None
9.9 Sec.
9.9 Sec.
9.9 Sec.
Stop Bit Select
One
One
One
One
One
One
One
ASCII Format
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
7-Bit
8-Bit
7-Bit
Beep On <BEL>
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
RTS Line State
High
Low
Low
Low = No data to Low send
High
High
Prefix
None
None
None
None
STX (1003) None
STX (1002)
In the Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A/B, if CTS is low, scanning is disabled. When CTS is high, scanning is enabled. If you scan Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A/B without connecting the scanner to the proper host, it may appear unable to scan. If this happens, scan a different RS-232 host type within 5 seconds of cycling power to the scanner. The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select CUTE, scan *Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning (1) on page 4-6, then change the host selection.
RS-232 Interface 9 - 5
RS-232 Host Parameters (continued)
Selecting ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS/JPOS, Olivetti, Omron, or CUTE-LP/LG bar code readers transmits the code ID characters listed in Table 9-3. These code ID characters are not programmable and are separate from the Transmit Code ID feature. Do not enable the Transmit Code ID feature for these terminals.
Table 9-3 Terminal Specific Code ID Characters
Code Type
Wincor- Wincor-Nixdorf
ICL
Fujitsu Nixdorf
Mode B/
Olivetti Omron CUTE
Mode A
OPOS/JPOS
UPC-A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
UPC-E
E
E
C
C
C
E
None
EAN-8/JAN-8
FF
FF
B
B
B
FF
None
EAN-13/JAN-13 F
F
A
A
A
F
A
Code 39
C <len> None
M
M
M <len> C <len> 3
Code 39 Full ASCII None
None
M
M
None
None
3
Codabar
N <len> None
N
N
N <len> N <len> None
Code 128
L <len> None
K
K
K <len> L <len> 5
I 2 of 5
I <len> None
I
I
I <len> I <len> 1
Code 93
None
None
L
L
L <len> None
None
D 2 of 5
H <len> None
H
H
H <len> H <len> 2
GS1-128
L <len> None
P
P
P <len> L <len> 5
MSI
None
None
O
O
O <len> None
None
Bookland EAN
F
F
A
A
A
F
None
Trioptic
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Code 11
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
IATA
H<len> None
H
H
H<len> H<len> 2
Code 32
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
GS1 DataBar
None
None
E
E
Variants
None
None
None
PDF417
None
None
Q
Q
None
None
6
Data Matrix
None
None
R
R
None
None
4
GS1 Data Matrix None
None
W
W
None
None
None
QR Codes
None
None
U
U
None
None
7
GS1 QR
None
None
X
X
None
None
None
9 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table 9-3 Terminal Specific Code ID Characters (Continued)
Code Type
Wincor- Wincor-Nixdorf
ICL
Fujitsu Nixdorf
Mode B/
Mode A
OPOS/JPOS
Aztec/Aztec Rune None
None
V
V
Maxicode
None
None
T
T
MicroPDF
None
None
S
S
Olivetti
None None None
Omron
None None None
CUTE
8 None 6
RS-232 Host Types
To select an RS-232 host interface, scan one of the following bar codes.
NOTE For a list of supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see Appendix J, Communication Protocol Functionality.
*Standard RS-2321
ICL RS-232
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode B 1Scanning Standard RS-232 activates the RS-232 driver, but does not change port settings (e.g., parity, data bits, handshaking). Selecting another RS-232 host type bar code changes these settings.
RS-232 Host Types (continued)
Olivetti ORS4500
RS-232 Interface 9 - 7
OPOS/JPOS
Omron
Fujitsu RS-232
CUTE2 2The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select CUTE, scan *Enable Parameter Bar Code Scanning (1) on page 4-6, and then change the host selection.
9 - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Baud Rate
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Scan one of the following bar codes to set the scanner's baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host device or may reach it in distorted form.
NOTE The scanner does not support baud rates below 9600.
*Baud Rate 9600
Baud Rate 38,400 Baud Rate 115,200
Baud Rate 19,200 Baud Rate 57,600
RS-232 Interface 9 - 9
Parity
A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Scan one of the following bar codes to select the parity type according to host device requirements:
· Odd - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains an
odd number of 1 bits.
· Even - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains an
even number of 1 bits.
· None - No parity bit is required.
Odd
Even
*None
Stop Bits
The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. Scan one of the following bar codes to set the number of stop bits (one or two) based on the number the receiving host can accommodate.
*1 Stop Bit
2 Stop Bits
9 - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Data Bits
This parameter allows the scanner to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit ASCII protocol.
7-bit
*8-bit
Check Receive Errors
Scan one of the following bar codes to set whether to check the parity, framing, and overrun of received characters. The parity value of received characters is verified against the value set for Parity on page 9-9.
*Check For Received Errors
Do Not Check For Received Errors
RS-232 Interface 9 - 11
Hardware Handshaking
The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without the hardware handshaking lines Request to Send (RTS) and Clear to Send (CTS).
If hardware handshaking and software handshaking are both enabled, hardware handshaking takes precedence.
NOTE The DTR signal is jumpered to the active state.
Options:
· None - This disables hardware handshaking and transmits scan data as it becomes available. · Standard RTS/CTS - This sets standard RTS/CTS hardware handshaking and transmits scanned data
according to the following sequence: a. The scanner reads the CTS line for activity:
· If the CTS line is de-asserted, the scanner asserts the RTS line and waits up to Host Serial Response Timeout on page 9-15 for the host to assert CTS, and then transmits data when asserted. If, after the timeout, the CTS line is not asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data.
· If CTS is asserted, the scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Timeout for the host to de-assert CTS. If after this timeout the CTS line is still asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the scanned data.
b. The scanner de-asserts RTS after sending the last character of data. c. The host negates CTS. The scanner checks for a de-asserted CTS upon the next data transmission. During data transmission, if CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data. The data must be re-scanned.
· RTS/CTS Option 1 - The scanner asserts RTS before transmitting and ignores the state of CTS. The
scanner de-asserts RTS when transmission completes.
· RTS/CTS Option 2 - RTS is always high or low (user-programmed logic level). However, the scanner waits
for the host to assert CTS before transmitting data. If CTS is not asserted within the Host Serial Response Timeout, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data. During data transmission, if CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data.
· RTS/CTS Option 3 - This transmits scanned data according to the following sequence:
a. The scanner asserts RTS before data transmission, regardless of the state of CTS. b. The scanner waits up to the Host Serial Response Timeout for the host to assert CTS, and then transmits
data when asserted. If, after the timeout, the CTS line is not asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data. c. The scanner de-asserts RTS after sending the last character of data. d. The host negates CTS. The scanner checks for a de-asserted CTS upon the next data transmission. During data transmission, if CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data. The data must be re-scanned.
9 - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Hardware Handshaking (continued)
*None
RTS/CTS Option 1 RTS/CTS Option 3
Standard RTS/CTS RTS/CTS Option 2
RS-232 Interface 9 - 13
Software Handshaking
This parameter offers control of data transmission in addition to, or instead of, that offered by hardware handshaking. If software handshaking and hardware handshaking are both enabled, hardware handshaking takes precedence.
Options:
· None - This transmits data immediately. The scanner expects no response from the host.
· ACK/NAK - After transmitting data, the scanner waits for an ACK or NAK response from the host. If it
receives a NAK, the scanner transmits the data again and waits for an ACK or NAK. After three unsuccessful attempts to send data after receiving NAKs, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data.
The scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Timeout to receive an ACK or NAK. If the scanner does not get a response in this time, it sounds a transmit error and discards the data. There are no reattempts.
· ENQ - The scanner waits for an ENQ character from the host before transmitting data. If it does not receive
an ENQ within the Host Serial Response Timeout, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data. The host must transmit an ENQ character at least every Host Serial Response Timeout to prevent transmission errors.
· ACK/NAK with ENQ - This combines the two previous options. An additional ENQ is not required to
re-transmit data due to a NAK from the host.
· XON/XOFF - An XOFF character stops data transmission until the scanner receives an XON character.
There are two situations for XON/XOFF: · The scanner receives an XOFF before it has data to send. When the scanner has data, it waits up to the
Host Serial Response Timeout for an XON character before transmitting. If it does not receive the XON within this time, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data. · The scanner receives an XOFF during data transmission and stops transmission after sending the current byte. When the scanner receives an XON character, it sends the rest of the data. The scanner waits indefinitely for the XON.
9 - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Software Handshaking (continued)
*None
ENQ XON/XOFF
ACK/NAK ACK/NAK with ENQ
RS-232 Interface 9 - 15 Host Serial Response Timeout
Scan one of the following bar codes to specify how long the scanner waits for an ACK, NAK, or CTS before determining that a transmission error occurred. This only applies when in one of the ACK/NAK software handshaking modes, or RTS/CTS hardware handshaking mode.
*Minimum: 2 Seconds
Low: 2.5 Seconds
Medium: 5 Seconds
High: 7.5 Seconds
Maximum: 9.9 Seconds
9 - 16 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide RTS Line State
Scan one of the following bar codes to set the idle state of the serial host RTS line to Low RTS or High RTS.
*Host: Low RTS
Host: High RTS
Beep on <BEL>
Scan one of the following bar codes to set whether the scanner issues a beep when it detects a <BEL> character on the RS-232 serial line. <BEL> indicates an illegal entry or other important event.
Beep On <BEL> Character (Enable)
*Do Not Beep On <BEL> Character
(Disable)
RS-232 Interface 9 - 17 Intercharacter Delay
Scan one of the following bar codes to specify the intercharacter delay inserted between character transmissions.
*Minimum: 0 msec
Low: 25 msec
Medium: 50 msec
High: 75 msec
Maximum: 99 msec
9 - 18 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options
If you selected Nixdorf Mode B, scan one of the following bar codes to indicate when the scanner beeps and turns on its LED after a decode.
*Normal Operation
(Beep/LED Immediately After Decode)
Beep/LED After Transmission
Beep/LED After CTS Pulse
Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Scan Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to send all bar code data except for unknown characters. The scanner issues no error beeps. Scan Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to send bar code data up to the first unknown character. The scanner issues an error beep.
*Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters
Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters
ASCII Character Set for RS-232
See Appendix I, ASCII Character Sets for Prefix/Suffix values. The values in Table I-1 can be assigned as prefixes or suffixes for ASCII character data transmission.
CHAPTER 10 IBM 468X / 469X INTERFACE
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the cradle with an IBM 468X/469X host. The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 10-1 on page 10-3 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan Set Factory Defaults on page 4-5. Throughout the programming bar
code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default *Enable Parameter
Feature/option
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to select the Port 9B address, scan the Hand-Held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B) bar code under Port Address on page 10-4. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several bar codes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
10 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Connecting an IBM 468X/469X Host
Connect the scanner directly to the host computer.
Interface cable
Host port connector Figure 10-1 IBM Connection
NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors can be different than those illustrated in Figure 10-1, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.
1. Attach the modular connector of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the cable interface port on the cradle. 2. Connect the other end of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the appropriate port on the host (typically Port 9). 3. The scanner automatically detects the host interface type, but there is no default setting. Scan the appropriate
bar code from Port Address on page 10-4 to select the port address. 4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter.
NOTE The only required configuration is the port address. The IBM system typically controls other scanner parameters.
If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 3-3.
IBM 468X / 469X Interface 10 - 3
IBM Parameter Defaults
Table 10-1 lists defaults for IBM host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
· Scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 4-5.
· Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See Chapter 13, 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 10-1 IBM Parameter Defaults Parameter
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters Port Address Convert Unknown to Code 39 RS-485 Beep Directive RS-485 Bar Code Configuration Directive IBM-485 Specification Version
Default
None Disable Ignore Ignore Original Specification
Page Number
10-4 10-5 10-5 10-6 10-6
10 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
IBM Host Parameters
Port Address
Scan one of the following bar codes to select the IBM 468X/469X port. NOTE Scanning a Port Address bar code enables the RS-485 interface on the scanner. NOTE For a list of supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see Appendix J, Communication Protocol Functionality.
*None
Hand-Held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B)
Non-IBM Scanner Emulation (Port 5B)
Table-Top Scanner Emulation (Port 17)
IBM 468X / 469X Interface 10 - 5 Convert Unknown to Code 39
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable converting unknown bar code type data to Code 39.
Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39
*Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39
RS-485 Beep Directive
The IBM RS-485 host can send a beeper configuration request to the scanner. Scan Ignore Beep Directive to prevent the scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the host as if they were processed.
Honor Beep Directive
*Ignore Beep Directive
10 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
RS-485 Bar Code Configuration Directive
The IBM RS-485 host can enable and disable code types. Scan Ignore Bar Code Configuration Directive to prevent the scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the IBM RS-485 host as if they were processed.
Honor Bar Code Configuration Directive
*Ignore Bar Code Configuration Directive
IBM-485 Specification Version Parameter # 1729 (SSI # F8h 06h C1h)
The IBM interface specification version selected defines how code types are reported over the IBM interface. When you scan Original Specification, only Symbologies that were historically supported on each individual port are reported as known. When you scan Version 2.2, all Symbologies covered in the newer IBM specification are reported as known with their respective code types.
*Original Specification
(0)
Version 2.2 (1)
CHAPTER 11 KEYBOARD WEDGE INTERFACE
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up a keyboard wedge interface with the cradle. The cradle connects between the keyboard and host computer and translates bar code data into keystrokes, which the host accepts as if they originated from the keyboard. This mode adds bar code reading functionality to a system designed for manual keyboard input. Keyboard keystrokes are simply passed through. The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 11-1 on page 11-3 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan a bar code in Default Parameters on page 4-5. Throughout the
programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default *Enable Parameter
Feature/option
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to select a medium keystroke delay, scan the Medium Delay (20 msec) bar code under Keystroke Delay on page 11-5. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several bar codes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
11 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface
Keyboard connector
Male DIN connectors
Figure 11-1 Keyboard Wedge Connection
NOTE Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors can be different than those illustrated in Figure 11-1, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.
1. Turn off the host and unplug the keyboard connector. 2. Attach the modular connector of the Y-cable to the cable interface port on the cradle. 3. Connect the round male DIN host connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard port on the host device. 4. Connect the round female DIN keyboard connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard connector. 5. If required, attach the optional power supply to the connector in the middle of the Y-cable. 6. Ensure that all connections are secure. 7. Turn on the host system. 8. The digital scanner automatically detects the host interface type and uses the default setting. If the default (*)
does not meet your requirements, scan IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles on page 11-4. 9. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide.
If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 3-3.
Keyboard Wedge Interface 11 - 3
Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults
Table 11-1 lists the defaults for Keyboard Wedge host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) in Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters on page 11-4.
NOTE See Appendix B, Country Codes for Keyboard Wedge Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes).
See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 11-1 Keyboard Wedge Host Default Table
Parameter
Default
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Type
IBM AT Notebook
Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
Keystroke Delay
No Delay
Intra-keystroke Delay
Disable
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation
Enable
Quick Keypad Emulation
Enable
Simulated Caps Lock
Disable
Caps Lock Override
Disable
Convert Case
Do Not Convert
Function Key Mapping
Disable
FN1 Substitution
Disable
Send Make and Break
Send
Page Number
11-4 11-4 11-5 11-5 11-6 11-6 11-7 11-7 11-8 11-8 11-9 11-9
11 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Types
Select the Keyboard Wedge host by scanning one of the bar codes below. NOTE For a list of supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see Appendix J, Communication Protocol Functionality.
IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles
*IBM AT Notebook
Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Scan Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to send all bar code data except for unknown characters. The scanner issues no error beeps. Scan Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to send bar code data up to the first unknown character. The scanner issues an error beep.
*Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters
Keyboard Wedge Interface 11 - 5 Keystroke Delay
This is the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes. Scan one of the following bar codes to increase the delay when hosts require a slower data transmission.
*No Delay
Medium Delay (20 msec)
Long Delay (40 msec)
Intra-keystroke Delay
Scan Enable Intra-keystroke Delay to insert an additional delay between each emulated key press and release. This also sets Keystroke Delay to a minimum of 5 msec.
Enable Intra-keystroke Delay
*Disable Intra-keystroke Delay
11 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation
This allows emulation of most other country keyboard types not listed in Appendix B, Country Codes in a Microsoft® operating system environment.
NOTE If your keyboard type is not listed in the country code list (see USB and Keyboard Wedge Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) on page B-2), disable Quick Keypad Emulation on page 11-6 and ensure Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 11-6 is enabled.
*Enable Alternate Numeric Keypad
Disable Alternate Numeric Keypad
Quick Keypad Emulation
This enables faster keypad emulation where character value sequences are only sent for characters not found on the keyboard.
NOTE This option applies only when Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation is enabled.
*Enable Quick Keypad Emulation
Disable Quick Keypad Emulation
Keyboard Wedge Interface 11 - 7 Simulated Caps Lock
Scan Enable Caps Lock to invert upper and lower case characters on the bar code as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard. This inversion occurs regardless of the keyboard's Caps Lock state. Note that Simulated Caps Lock applies to ASCII alpha characters only.
Enable Caps Lock
*Disable Caps Lock
Caps Lock Override
Scan Enable Caps Lock Override for AT or AT Notebook hosts to preserve the case of the data regardless of the state of the Caps Lock key. Therefore, an `A' in the bar code transmits as an `A' regardless of the setting of the keyboard's Caps Lock key.
Enable Caps Lock Override
*Disable Caps Lock Override
NOTE If both Simulated Caps Lock and Caps Lock Override are enabled, Caps Lock Override takes precedence.
11 - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Convert Case
Scan one of the following bar codes to convert all bar code data to the selected case. NOTE Convert Case applies to ASCII characters only.
Convert to Upper Case
Convert to Lower Case
*Do Not Convert
Function Key Mapping
ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences (see Table I-1 on page I-1). Scan Enable Function Key Mapping to send the keys in bold in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not you enable this parameter.
Enable Function Key Mapping
*Disable Function Key Mapping
Keyboard Wedge Interface 11 - 9 FN1 Substitution
Scan Enable FN1 Substitution to replace FN1 characters in an EAN128 bar code with a user-selected keystroke (see FN1 Substitution Values on page 4-36).
Enable FN1 Substitution
*Disable FN1 Substitution
Send Make and Break
Scan Send Make and Break Scan Codes to prevent sending the scan codes for releasing a key.
*Send Make and Break Scan Codes
Send Make Scan Code Only NOTE Windows-based systems must use Send Make and Break Scan Codes.
11 - 10DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Keyboard Map
The following keyboard map is a reference for prefix/suffix keystroke parameters. To program the prefix/suffix values, see the bar codes on page 4-33.
7014
5001 5002 5003 5004
5005 5006 5007 5008
5009 5010 5011 5012
7010
7007
7006 7001
7009
7008 7013
7011 7012 7003 7002 7004 7005
7015 7017 7016 7018
Figure 11-2 IBM PS2 Type Keyboard
ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge
NOTE Code 39 Full ASCII interprets the bar code special character ($ + % /) preceding a Code 39 character and assigns an ASCII character value to the pair. For example, if you enable Code 39 Full ASCII and scan +B, it transmits as b, %J as ?, and %V as @. Scanning ABC%I outputs the keystroke equivalent of ABC >.
See Appendix I, ASCII Character Sets for the following: · ASCII Character Set (Table I-1 on page I-1) · ALT Key Character Set (Table I-2 on page I-6) · GUI Key Character Set (Table I-3 on page I-7) · F Key Character Set (Table I-5 on page I-10) · Numeric Key Character Set (Table I-6 on page I-11) · Extended Key Character Set (Table I-7 on page I-12).
CHAPTER 12 SYMBOLOGIES
Introduction
You can program the scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes symbology features and provides programming bar codes for selecting these features. The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 12-1 on page 12-2 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
If not using a USB cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host. To return all features to default values, see Default Parameters on page 4-5. Throughout the programming bar
code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Indicates default
*Enable Parameter
Feature/option
12 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to transmit bar code data without the UPC-A check digit, scan the Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit bar code under Transmit UPC-A Check Digit on page 12-18. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry. Other parameters, such as Set Lengths for D 2 of 5, require scanning several bar codes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Symbology Parameter Defaults
Table 12-1 lists defaults for all symbology parameters. Change these values in one of two ways: · Scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in memory. To recall the default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 4-5. · Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See Chapter 12, Symbologies.
NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 12-1 Symbology Parameter Defaults Parameter
Enable/Disable All Code Types
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
1D Symbologies
UPC/EAN/JAN UPC-A UPC-E UPC-E1 EAN-8/JAN 8 EAN-13/JAN 13 Bookland EAN Bookland ISBN Format ISSN EAN
1
01h
Enable
2
02h
Enable
12
0Ch
Disable
4
04h
Enable
3
03h
Enable
83
53h
Disable
576
F1h 40h
ISBN-10
617
F1h 69h
Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number 12-8
12-9 12-9 12-10 12-10 12-11 12-11 12-12 12-12
Symbologies 12 - 3
Table 12-1 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
16
10h
Ignore
(2 and 5 digits)
User-Programmable Supplementals
Supplemental 1:
579
Supplemental 2:
580
000 F1h 43h F1h 44h
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy 80
50h
10
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM 672 ID Format
F1h A0h
Combined
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
40
28h
Enable
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
41
29h
Enable
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
42
2Ah
Enable
UPC-A Preamble
34
22h
System Character
UPC-E Preamble
35
23h
System Character
UPC-E1 Preamble
36
24h
System Character
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A
37
25h
Disable
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A
38
26h
Disable
EAN/JAN Zero Extend
39
27h
Disable
UCC Coupon Extended Code
85
55h
Disable
Coupon Report
730
F1h DAh
New Coupon
Format
UPC Reduced Quiet Zone
1289
F8h 05h 09h Disable
Code 128
Code 128
8
08h
Enable
Set Lengths for Code 128
209, 210
D1h, D2h
1 - 55
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128)
14
0Eh
Enable
ISBT 128
84
54h
Disable
ISBT Concatenation
577
F1h 41h
Disable
Check ISBT Table
578
F1h 42h
Enable
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy
223
DFh
10
Code 128 <FNC4>
1254
F8h 04h E6h Honor
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number 12-13
12-16
12-16 12-17
12-18 12-18 12-19 12-20 12-21 12-22 12-23 12-23 12-24 12-24 12-25
12-25
12-26 12-26 12-27 12-28 12-29 12-30 12-30 12-31
12 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table 12-1 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Code 128 Security Level
751
F1h EFh
Security Level 1
Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone
1208
F8h 04h B8h Disable
Code 39
Code 39
0
00h
Enable
Trioptic Code 39
13
0Dh
Disable
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 (Italian Pharmacy Code)
86
56h
Disable
Code 32 Prefix
231
E7h
Disable
Set Lengths for Code 39
18, 19
12h, 13h
1 - 55
Code 39 Check Digit Verification
48
30h
Disable
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit
43
2Bh
Disable
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
17
11h
Disable
Code 39 Security Level
750
F1h EEh
Security Level 1
Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone
1209
F8h 04h B9h Disable
Code 93
Code 93
9
09h
Enable
Set Lengths for Code 93
26, 27
1Ah, 1Bh
1 - 55
Code 11
Code 11
10
0Ah
Disable
Set Lengths for Code 11
28, 29
1Ch, 1Dh
4 to 55
Code 11 Check Digit Verification
52
34h
Disable
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s)
47
2Fh
Disable
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF/I 2 of 5)
Interleaved 2 of 5
6
06h
Enable
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5
22, 23
16h, 17h
6 to 55
Interleaved 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification 49
31h
Disable
Transmit Interleaved 2 of 5 Check Digit
44
2Ch
Disable
Convert Interleaved 2 of 5 to EAN-13
82
52h
Disable
Febraban
1750
F8h 06h D6h Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number 12-31 12-32
12-33 12-33 12-34
12-34 12-35 12-36 12-37 12-37 12-38 12-40
12-40 12-41
12-43 12-43 12-45 12-46
12-46 12-47 12-49 12-50 12-50 12-51
Symbologies 12 - 5
Table 12-1 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Interleaved 2 of 5 Security Level
1121
F8h 04h 61h Security Level 1
Interleaved 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone
1210
F8h 04h BAh Disable
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF/D 2 of 5)
Discrete 2 of 5
5
05h
Disable
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5
20, 21
14h 15h
1 to 55
Codabar (NW - 7)
Codabar
7
07h
Enable
Set Lengths for Codabar
24, 25
18h, 19h
4 to 55
CLSI Editing
54
36h
Disable
NOTIS Editing
55
37h
Disable
Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/
855
Stop Characters Detection
F2h 57h
Upper Case
MSI
MSI
11
0Bh
Disable
Set Lengths for MSI
30, 31
1Eh, 1Fh
4 to 55
MSI Check Digits
50
32h
One
Transmit MSI Check Digit
46
2Eh
Disable
MSI Check Digit Algorithm
51
33h
Mod 10/Mod 10
MSI Reduced Quiet Zone
1392
F8h 05h 70h Disable
Chinese 2 of 5
Chinese 2 of 5
408
F0h 98h
Disable
Matrix 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5
618
F1h 6Ah
Disable
Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths
619
F1h 6Bh
4 to 55
620
F1h 6Ch
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
622
F1h 6Eh
Disable
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
623
F1h 6Fh
Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number 12-52 12-53
12-53 12-54
12-56 12-56 12-58 12-58 12-59
12-59 12-60 12-62 12-62 12-63 12-63
12-64
12-64 12-65
12-67 12-67
12 - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table 12-1 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Korean 3 of 5
Korean 3 of 5
581
F1h 45h
Disable
Inverse 1D
586
F1h 4Ah
Regular
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly
338
GS1 DataBar-14), GS1 DataBar Truncated,
GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar
Stacked Omnidirectional
F0h 52h
Enable
GS1 DataBar Limited
339
F0h 53h
Enable
GS1 DataBar Expanded, GS1 DataBar
340
Expanded Stacked
F0h 54h
Enable
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN
397
F0h 8Dh
Disable
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check
728
F1h D8h
Level 3
GS1 DataBar Security Level
1706
F8h 06h AAh Level 1
Symbology-Specific Security Features
Redundancy Level
78
4Eh
1
Security Level
77
4Dh
1
1D Quiet Zone Level
1288
F8h 05h 08h 1
Intercharacter Gap Size
381
F0h 7Dh
Normal
Composite Codes
Composite CC-C
341
F0h 55h
Disable
Composite CC-A/B
342
F0h 56h
Disable
Composite TLC-39
371
F0h 73h
Disable
Composite Inverse
1113
F8h 04h 59h Regular Only
UPC Composite Mode
344
F0h 58h
UPC Never Linked
Composite Beep Mode
398
F0h 8Eh
Beep As Each
Code Type is
Decoded
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN
427
Composite Codes
F0h ABh
Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number
12-68 12-69
12-70
12-70 12-71
12-71 12-72 12-73
12-74 12-76 12-77 12-78
12-78 12-79 12-79 12-80 12-81 12-82
12-82
Symbologies 12 - 7
Table 12-1 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
2D Symbologies
PDF417
15
0Fh
Enable
MicroPDF417
227
E3h
Disable
Code 128 Emulation
123
7Bh
Disable
Data Matrix
292
F0h 24h
Enable
GS1 Data Matrix
1336
F8h 05h 38h Disable
Data Matrix Inverse
588
F1h 4Ch
Inverse Autodetect
Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images
537
F1h 19h
Auto
Maxicode
294
F0h 26h
Disable
QR Code
293
F0h 25h
Enable
GS1 QR
1343
F8h 05h 3Fh Disable
MicroQR
573
F1h 3Dh
Enable
Aztec
574
F1h 3Eh
Enable
Aztec Inverse
589
F1h 4Dh
Inverse Autodetect
Han Xin
1167
F8h 04h 8Fh Disable
Han Xin Inverse
1168
F8h 04h 90h Regular
Grid Matrix
1718
F8 06 B6
Disable
Grid Matrix Inverse
1719
F8 06 B7
Regular Only
Grid Matrix Mirror
1736
F8 06 C8
Regular Only
Postal Codes
US Postnet
89
59h
Disable
US Planet
90
5Ah
Disable
Transmit US Postal Check Digit
95
5Fh
Enable
UK Postal
91
5Bh
Disable
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit
96
60h
Enable
Japan Postal
290
F0h 22h
Disable
Australia Post
291
F0h 23h
Disable
Australia Post Format
718
F1h CEh
Autodiscriminate
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number
12-83 12-83 12-84 12-85 12-85 12-86 12-87 12-88 12-88 12-89 12-89 12-90 12-91 12-92 12-92 12-93 12-93 12-94
12-96 12-96 12-97 12-97 12-98 12-98 12-99 12-100
12 - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table 12-1 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number 1
SSI Number 2
Default
Netherlands KIX Code
326
F0h 46h
Disable
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
592
F1h 50h
Disable
UPU FICS Postal
611
F1h 63h
Disable
Mailmark
1337
F8h 05h 39h Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands. 2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page Number 12-101 12-101 12-102 12-102
Enable/Disable All Code Types
Scan the Disable All Code Types bar code to disable all symbologies. This is useful when enabling only a few code types.
Scan Enable All Code Types to enable all symbologies. This is useful if you need to disable only a few code types.
Disable All Code Types
Enable All Code Types
UPC/EAN/JAN
UPC-A Parameter # 1 SSI # 01h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable UPC-A.
Symbologies 12 - 9
*Enable UPC-A
(1)
Disable UPC-A (0)
UPC-E Parameter # 2 SSI # 02h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable UPC-E.
*Enable UPC-E
(1)
Disable UPC-E (0)
12 - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
UPC-E1 Parameter # 12 SSI # 0Ch
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable UPC-E1. NOTE UPC-E1 is not a UCC (Uniform Code Council) approved symbology.
Enable UPC-E1 (1)
*Disable UPC-E1
(0)
EAN-8/JAN-8 Parameter # 4 SSI # 04h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable EAN-8/JAN-8.
*Enable EAN-8/JAN-8
(1)
Disable EAN-8/JAN-8 (0)
Symbologies 12 - 11
EAN-13/JAN-13 Parameter # 3 SSI # 03h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable EAN-13/JAN-13.
*Enable EAN-13/JAN-13
(1)
Disable EAN-13/JAN-13 (0)
Bookland EAN Parameter # 83 SSI # 53h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Bookland EAN.
Enable Bookland EAN (1)
*Disable Bookland EAN
(0) NOTE If you enable Bookland EAN, select a Bookland ISBN Format. Also set Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
on page 12-13 to either Decode UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals Only, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN With Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode.
12 - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Bookland ISBN Format Parameter # 576 SSI # F1h 40h
If you enabled Bookland EAN using Bookland EAN on page 12-11, select one of the following formats for Bookland data:
· Bookland ISBN-10 - The scanner reports Bookland data starting with 978 in traditional 10-digit format with the special Bookland check digit for backward-compatibility. Data starting with 979 is not considered Bookland in this mode.
· Bookland ISBN-13 - The scanner reports Bookland data (starting with either 978 or 979) as EAN-13 in 13-digit format to meet the 2007 ISBN-13 protocol.
*Bookland ISBN-10
(0)
Bookland ISBN-13 (1)
NOTE For Bookland EAN to function properly, first enable Bookland EAN using Bookland EAN on page 12-11, and then set Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page 12-13 to either Decode UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals Only, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN With Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode.
ISSN EAN Parameter # 617 SSI # F1h 69h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable ISSN EAN.
Enable ISSN EAN (1)
*Disable ISSN EAN
(0)
Symbologies 12 - 13
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
Parameter # 16
SSI # 10h
Supplementals are bar codes appended according to specific format conventions (e.g., UPC A+2, UPC E+2, EAN-13+2). The following options are available:
· Decode UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals Only - The scanner only decodes UPC/EAN/JAN symbols with supplemental characters, and ignores symbols without supplementals.
· Ignore UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals - When presented with a UPC/EAN/JAN plus supplemental symbol, the scanner decodes UPC/EAN/JAN and ignores the supplemental characters.
· Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals - The scanner decodes UPC/EAN/JAN symbols with supplemental characters immediately. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the scanner must decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 12-16 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental.
Select one of the following Supplemental Mode options to immediately transmit EAN-13 bar codes starting with that prefix that have supplemental characters. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the scanner must decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 12-16 before transmitting the data to confirm that there is no supplemental. The scanner transmits UPC/EAN/JAN bar codes that do not have that prefix immediately.
· Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode · Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode
NOTE If you select 978/979 Supplemental Mode and are scanning Bookland EAN bar codes, see Bookland EAN on page 12-11 to enable Bookland EAN, and select a format using Bookland ISBN Format on page 12-12.
· Enable 977 Supplemental Mode · Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode · Enable 491 Supplemental Mode · Enable Smart Supplemental Mode - This applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed
previously. · Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 - This applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with a 3-digit
user-defined prefix. Set this using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 12-16. · Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2 - This applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with either of
two 3-digit user-defined prefixes. Set the prefixes using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 12-16. · Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 - This applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any
prefix listed previously or the prefix set using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 12-16. · Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2 - This applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with
any prefix listed previously or one of the two user-defined prefixes set using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 12-16.
NOTE To minimize the risk of invalid data transmission, select either to decode or ignore supplemental characters.
12 - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN With Supplementals Only (1)
*Ignore UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
(0)
Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals (2)
Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode (4)
Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode (5)
Enable 977 Supplemental Mode (7)
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)
Symbologies 12 - 15
Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode (6)
Enable 491 Supplemental Mode (8)
Enable Smart Supplemental Mode (3)
Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 (9)
Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2 (10)
Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 (11)
Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2 (12)
12 - 16 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
User-Programmable Supplementals Supplemental 1: Parameter # 579 SSI # F1h 43h Supplemental 2: Parameter # 580 SSI # F1h 44h
If you selected a Supplemental User-Programmable option from Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page 12-13, scan User-Programmable Supplemental 1, and then scan three bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes to set the 3-digit prefix. To set a second 3-digit prefix, scan User-Programmable Supplemental 2, and then scan three bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. The default is 000 (zeroes).
User-Programmable Supplemental 1
User-Programmable Supplemental 2
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy Parameter # 80 SSI # 50h
If you selected Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals, this option sets the number of times to decode a symbol without supplementals before transmission. The range is from two to 30. Five or above is recommended when decoding a mix of UPC/EAN/JAN symbols with and without supplementals. The default is 10. To set a redundancy value, scan the following bar code, and then scan two bar codes from Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy
Symbologies 12 - 17
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format Parameter # 672 SSI # F1h A0h
If Transmit Code ID Character on page 4-32 is set to AIM Code ID Character, scan one of the following bar codes to select an output format when reporting UPC/EAN/JAN bar codes with supplementals:
· Separate - Transmit UPC/EAN/JAN with supplementals with separate AIM IDs but one transmission, i.e., ]E<0 or 4><data>]E<1 or 2>[supplemental data]
· Combined Transmit UPC/EAN/JAN with supplementals with one AIM ID and one transmission, i.e., ]E3<data+supplemental data>
· Separate Transmissions - Transmit UPC/EAN/JAN with supplementals with separate AIM IDs and separate transmissions, i.e., ]E<0 or 4><data> ]E<1 or 2>[supplemental data]
Separate (0)
Separate Transmissions (2)
*Combined
(1)
12 - 18 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit Parameter # 40 SSI # 28h
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following bar codes to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-A check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.
*Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
(1)
Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit (0)
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit Parameter # 41 SSI # 29h
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following bar codes to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-E check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.
*Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
(1)
Do Not Transmit UPC-E Check Digit (0)
Symbologies 12 - 19
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit Parameter # 42 SSI # 2Ah
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following bar codes to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-E1 check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.
*Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
(1)
Do Not Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit (0)
12 - 20 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
UPC-A Preamble Parameter # 34 SSI # 22h
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. Select the appropriate option for transmitting a UPC-A preamble to match the host system:
· Transmit System Character only · Transmit System Character and Country Code ("0" for USA) · Transmit no preamble.
No Preamble (<DATA>) (0)
*System Character
(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>) (1)
System Character & Country Code (< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(2)
Symbologies 12 - 21
UPC-E Preamble Parameter # 35 SSI # 23h
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. Select the appropriate option for transmitting a UPC-E preamble to match the host system:
· Transmit System Character only · Transmit System Character and Country Code ("0" for USA) · Transmit no preamble.
No Preamble (<DATA>) (0)
*System Character
(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>) (1)
System Character & Country Code (< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(2)
12 - 22 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
UPC-E1 Preamble Parameter # 36 SSI # 24h
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. Select the appropriate option for transmitting a UPC-E1 preamble to match the host system:
· Transmit System Character only · Transmit System Character and Country Code ("0" for USA) · Transmit no preamble.
No Preamble (<DATA>) (0)
*System Character (<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(1)
System Character & Country Code (< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(2)
Symbologies 12 - 23
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A Parameter # 37 SSI # 25h
Enable this to convert UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit). Disable this to transmit UPC-E decoded data as UPC-E data, without conversion.
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Enable) (1)
*Do Not Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Disable)
(0)
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A Parameter # 38 SSI # 26h
Scan Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Enable) to convert UPC-E1 decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit). Scan Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Disable) to transmit UPC-E1 decoded data as UPC-E1 data, without conversion.
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Enable) (1)
*Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Disable)
(0)
12 - 24 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
EAN/JAN Zero Extend Parameter # 39 SSI # 27h
Scan Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend to add five leading zeros to decoded EAN-8 symbols to make them compatible in length to EAN-13 symbols. Scan Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend to transmit EAN-8 symbols as is.
Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend (1)
*Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend
(0)
UCC Coupon Extended Code Parameter # 85 SSI # 55h
Scan Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code to decode UPC-A bar codes starting with digit `5', EAN-13 bar codes starting with digit `99', and UPC-A/GS1-128 coupon codes. UPC-A, EAN-13, and GS1-128 must be enabled to use this feature.
Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code (1)
*Disable UCC Coupon Extended Code
(0) NOTE See UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 12-16 to control autodiscrimination of the
GS1-128 portion (right half) of a coupon code.
Symbologies 12 - 25
Coupon Report Parameter # 730 SSI # F1h DAh
Scan one of the following bar codes to select the type of coupon format to support. · Old Coupon Format - Support UPC-A/GS1-128 and EAN-13/GS1-128. · New Coupon Format - An interim format to support UPC-A/GS1-DataBar and EAN-13/GS1-DataBar. · Autodiscriminate Format - Support both Old Coupon Format and New Coupon Format.
Old Coupon Format (0)
*New Coupon Format
(1)
Autodiscriminate Coupon Format (2)
UPC Reduced Quiet Zone Parameter # 1289 SSI # F8h 05h 09h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable decoding UPC bar codes with reduced quiet zones (the margins on either side of the bar code). If you select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 12-77.
Enable UPC Reduced Quiet Zone (1)
*Disable UPC Reduced Quiet Zone
(0)
12 - 26 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Code 128
Parameter # 8 SSI # 08h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Code 128.
*Enable Code 128
(1)
Set Lengths for Code 128
L1 = Parameter # 209 SSI # D1h L2 = Parameter # 210 SSI # D2h
Disable Code 128 (0)
NOTE The maximum number of 1D bar code characters readable with scanner depends on the type of symbology, type of characters (i.e., digits or letters), printing density, and quality. For reference, the DS2278 reads 3.1 in wide, 10mil 1D bar codes printed with 1200dpi resolution and 80% contrast.
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 128 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. Minimum and maximum length range is from 0 - 80. The default minimum and maximum length range is from 1 - 55.
NOTE When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following bar codes to select a length option:
· One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 128 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 128 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 128 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 128 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 128 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 128 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Length Within Range - Decode Code 128 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 128 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan Code 128 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
Symbologies 12 - 27
Set Lengths for Code 128 (continued)
· Any Length - Decode Code 128 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner's capability.
Code 128 - One Discrete Length
*Code 128 - Length Within Range
(Default: 1 - 55)
Code 128 - Two Discrete Lengths
Code 128 - Any Length
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) Parameter # 14 SSI # 0Eh
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable GS1-128.
*Enable GS1-128
(1)
Disable GS1-128 (0)
12 - 28 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
ISBT 128 Parameter # 84 SSI # 54h
ISBT 128 is a variant of Code 128 used in the blood bank industry. Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable ISBT 128.
Enable ISBT 128 (1)
*Disable ISBT 128
(0)
Symbologies 12 - 29
ISBT Concatenation Parameter # 577 SSI # F1h 41h
Select an option for concatenating pairs of ISBT code types: · Enable ISBT Concatenation - There must be two ISBT codes in order for the scanner to decode and perform concatenation. The scanner does not decode single ISBT symbols. · Disable ISBT Concatenation - The scanner does not concatenate pairs of ISBT codes it encounters. · Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation - The scanner decodes and concatenates pairs of ISBT codes immediately. If only a single ISBT symbol is present, the scanner must decode the symbol the number of times set via ISBT Concatenation Redundancy on page 12-30 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no additional ISBT symbol.
Enable ISBT Concatenation (1)
Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation (2)
*Disable ISBT Concatenation
(0)
12 - 30 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Check ISBT Table Parameter # 578 SSI # F1h 42h
The ISBT specification includes a table that lists several types of ISBT bar codes that are commonly used in pairs. If you set ISBT Concatenation to Enable, enable Check ISBT Table to concatenate only those pairs found in this table. Other types of ISBT codes are not concatenated.
*Enable Check ISBT Table
(1)
Disable Check ISBT Table (0)
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy Parameter # 223 SSI # DFh
If ISBT Concatenation on page 12-29 is set to Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation, you can set the number of times the scanner must decode an ISBT symbol before determining that there is no additional symbol. To do so, scan ISBT Concatenation Redundancy below and then scan bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes to set a value between 2 and 20. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page G-3. The default is 10.
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy
Symbologies 12 - 31
Code 128 <FNC4> Parameter # 1254 SSI # F8h 04h E6h
This feature applies to Code 128 bar codes with an embedded <FNC4> character. Select Ignore Code 128 <FNC4> to strip the <FNC4> character from the decode data. The remaining characters are sent to the host unchanged. When disabled, the <FNC4> character is processed normally as per Code 128 standard.
*Honor Code 128 <FNC4>
(0)
Ignore Code 128 <FNC4> (1)
Code 128 Security Level Parameter # 751 SSI # F1h EFh
Code 128 bar codes are vulnerable to misdecodes, particularly when Code 128 Lengths is set to Any Length. The scanner offers four levels of decode security for Code 128 bar codes. There is an inverse relationship between security and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so select only the level of security necessary.
· Code 128 Security Level 0 - The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security in decoding most in-spec bar codes.
· Code 128 Security Level 1 - This option eliminates most misdecodes while maintaining reasonable aggressiveness.
· Code 128 Security Level 2 - This option applies greater bar code security requirements if Security Level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
· Code 128 Security Level 3 - If you selected Security Level 2, and misdecodes still occur, select this security level to apply the highest safety requirements. NOTE Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec bar codes, and significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve the quality of the bar codes.
12 - 32 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Code 128 Security Level (continued)
Code 128Security Level 0 (0)
*Code 128 Security Level 1
(1)
Code 128 Security Level 2 (2)
Code 128 Security Level 3 (3)
Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone Parameter # 1208 SSI # F8h 04h B8h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable decoding Code 128 bar codes with reduced quiet zones (the margins on either side of the bar code). If you select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 12-77.
Enable Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone (1)
*Disable Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone
(0)
Code 39
Parameter # 0 SSI # 00h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Code 39.
Symbologies 12 - 33
*Enable Code 39
(1)
Disable Code 39 (0)
Trioptic Code 39 Parameter # 13 SSI # 0Dh
Trioptic Code 39 is a variant of Code 39 used in the marking of computer tape cartridges. Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters. Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Trioptic Code 39.
Enable Trioptic Code 39 (1)
*Disable Trioptic Code 39
(0) NOTE You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously.
12 - 34 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 Parameter # 86 SSI # 56h
Code 32 is a variant of Code 39 used by the Italian pharmaceutical industry. Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable converting Code 39 to Code 32.
NOTE Code 39 must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Enable Convert Code 39 to Code 32 (1)
*Disable Convert Code 39 to Code 32
(0)
Code 32 Prefix Parameter # 231 SSI # E7h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable adding the prefix character "A" to all Code 32 bar codes. NOTE Convert Code 39 to Code 32 must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Enable Code 32 Prefix (1)
*Disable Code 32 Prefix
(0)
Symbologies 12 - 35
Set Lengths for Code 39
L1 = Parameter # 18 SSI # 12h
L2 = Parameter # 19 SSI # 13h
NOTE The maximum number of 1D bar code characters readable with scanner depends on the type of symbology, type of characters (i.e., digits or letters), printing density, and quality. For reference, the DS2278 reads 3.1 in wide, 10mil 1D bar codes printed with 1200dpi resolution and 80% contrast.
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 39 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. If Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled, Length Within Range or Any Length are the preferred options. Minimum and maximum length range is from 0 - 80. The default minimum and maximum length range is from 1 - 55.
NOTE When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following bar codes to select a length option:
· One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 39 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 39 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 39 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 39 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Length Within Range - Decode Code 39 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 39 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan Code 39 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Any Length - Decode Code 39 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner's capability.
12 - 36 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Code 39 (continued)
Code 39 - One Discrete Length
Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths
*Code 39 - Length Within Range (Default: 1 - 55)
Code 39 - Any Length
Code 39 Check Digit Verification Parameter # 48 SSI # 30h
Scan Enable Code 39 Check Digit to check the integrity of all Code 39 symbols to verify that the data complies with specified check digit algorithm. Only Code 39 symbols which include a modulo 43 check digit are decoded. Enable this feature if the Code 39 symbols contain a Modulo 43 check digit.
Enable Code 39 Check Digit (1)
*Disable Code 39 Check Digit
(0)
Symbologies 12 - 37
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Parameter # 43 SSI # 2Bh
Scan one of the following bar codes to transmit Code 39 data with or without the check digit.
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Enable) (1)
*Do Not Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Disable)
(0) NOTE Code 39 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Parameter # 17 SSI # 11h
Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full ASCII character set. Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Code 39 Full ASCII.
Enable Code 39 Full ASCII (1)
*Disable Code 39 Full ASCII
(0) NOTE You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously.
Code 39 Full ASCII to Full ASCII Correlation is host-dependent, and is therefore described in the ASCII character set table for the appropriate interface. See Table I-1 on page I-1.
12 - 38 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Code 39 Security Level
Parameter # 750
SSI # F1h EEh
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for Code 39 bar codes. There is an inverse relationship between security and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so select only the level of security necessary.
· Code 39 Security Level 0: The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security in decoding most in-spec bar codes.
· Code 39 Security Level 1: This default setting eliminates most misdecodes. · Code 39 Security Level 2: This option applies greater bar code security requirements if Security Level 1
fails to eliminate misdecodes. · Code 39 Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2, and misdecodes still occur, select this security level to
apply the highest safety requirements.
NOTE Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec bar codes, and significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve the quality of the bar codes.
Code 39 Security Level (continued)
Symbologies 12 - 39
Code 39 Security Level 0 (0)
Code 39 Security Level 2 (2)
*Code 39 Security Level 1
(1)
Code 39 Security Level 3 (3)
12 - 40 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone Parameter # 1209 SSI # F8h 04h B9h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable decoding Code 39 bar codes with reduced quiet zones (the margins on either side of the bar code). If you select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 12-77.
Enable Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone (1)
*Disable Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone
(0)
Code 93
Parameter # 9 SSI # 09h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Code 93.
*Enable Code 93
(1)
Disable Code 93 (0)
Symbologies 12 - 41
Code 93 (continued)
Set Lengths for Code 93
L1 = Parameter # 26 SSI # 1Ah
L2 = Parameter # 27 SSI # 1Bh
NOTE The maximum number of 1D bar code characters readable with scanner depends on the type of symbology, type of characters (i.e., digits or letters), printing density, and quality. For reference, the DS2278 reads 3.1 in wide, 10mil 1D bar codes printed with 1200dpi resolution and 80% contrast.
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 93 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. Minimum and maximum length range is from 0 - 55. The default minimum and maximum length range is from 1 - 55.
NOTE When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following bar codes to select a length option:
· One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 93 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 93 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 93 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 93 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 93 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Length Within Range - Decode Code 93 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 93 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan Code 93 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Any Length - Decode Code 93 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner's capability.
12 - 42 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Code 93 (continued)
Code 93 - One Discrete Length
*Code 93 - Length Within Range (Default: 1 - 55)
Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths Code 93 - Any Length
Code 11
Parameter # 10 SSI # 0Ah
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Code 11
Symbologies 12 - 43
Enable Code 11 (1)
*Disable Code 11
(0)
Set Lengths for Code 11 L1 = Parameter # 28 SSI # 1Ch L2 = Parameter # 29 SSI # 1Dh
NOTE The maximum number of 1D bar code characters readable with scanner depends on the type of symbology, type of characters (i.e., digits or letters), printing density, and quality. For reference, the DS2278 reads 3.1 in wide, 10mil 1D bar codes printed with 1200dpi resolution and 80% contrast.
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 11 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. Minimum and maximum length range is from 0 - 55. The default minimum and maximum length range is from 4 - 55.
NOTE When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following bar codes to select a length option: · One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 11 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 11 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 11 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
12 - 44 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Set Lengths for Code 11 (continued)
· Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 11 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Length Within Range - Decode Code 11 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 11 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan Code 11 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Any Length - Decode Code 11 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner's capability.
Code 11 - One Discrete Length
*Code 11 - Length Within Range (Default: 4 - 55)
Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths Code 11 - Any Length
Symbologies 12 - 45
Code 11 Check Digit Verification Parameter # 52 SSI # 34h
This feature allows the scanner to check the integrity of all Code 11 symbols to verify that the data complies with the specified check digit algorithm. Scan one of the following bar codes to specify the number of check digits encoded in the Code 11 symbols, or to disable this feature.
*Disable
(0)
Two Check Digits (2)
One Check Digit (1)
12 - 46 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Transmit Code 11 Check Digits Parameter # 47 SSI # 2Fh
Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether or not to transmit the Code 11 check digit(s).
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Enable) (1)
*Do Not Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Disable)
(0) NOTE Code 11 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF/I 2 of 5)
Parameter # 6 SSI # 06h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable I 2 of 5.
*Enable I 2 of 5
(1)
Disable I 2 of 5 (0)
Symbologies 12 - 47
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5
L1 = Parameter # 22 SSI # 16h
L2 = Parameter # 23 SSI # 17h
NOTE The maximum number of 1D bar code characters readable with scanner depends on the type of symbology, type of characters (i.e., digits or letters), printing density, and quality. For reference, the DS2278 reads 3.1 in wide, 10mil 1D bar codes printed with 1200dpi resolution and 80% contrast.
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for I 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. Minimum and maximum length range is from 0 - 55. The default minimum and maximum length range is from 6 - 55.
NOTE When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following bar codes to select a length option:
· One Discrete Length - Decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Length Within Range - Decode I 2 of 5 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
12 - 48 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 (continued)
· Any Length - Decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner's capability. NOTE Due to the construction of the I 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent this, select specific lengths (I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for I 2 of 5 applications, or increase the I 2 of 5 Security Level on page 12-52.
I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length
*I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range (Default: 6 - 55)
I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths I 2 of 5 - Any Length
Symbologies 12 - 49
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification Parameter # 49 SSI # 31h
Scan one of the following bar codes to check the integrity of all I 2 of 5 symbols to verify the data complies with either the specified Uniform Symbology Specification (USS), or the Optical Product Code Council (OPCC) check digit algorithm.
*Disable
(0)
OPCC Check Digit (2)
USS Check Digit (1)
12 - 50 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit Parameter # 44 SSI # 2Ch
Scan one of the following bar codes to transmit I 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Enable) (1)
*Do Not Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Disable)
(0)
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 Parameter # 82 SSI # 52h
Scan Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Enable) to convert 14-character I 2 of 5 codes to EAN-13, and transmit to the host as EAN-13. To accomplish this, the I 2 of 5 code must be enabled, and the code must have a leading zero and a valid EAN-13 check digit.
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Enable) (1)
*Do Not Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Disable)
(0)
Symbologies 12 - 51
Febraban Parameter # 1750 SSI # F8h 06h D6h
Febraban is an I 2 of 5 barcode of length 44 that requires special check characters to be inserted in the transmitted data stream. When enabled, the I 2 of 5 internal check digit calculation and transmission is disabled. When disabled, all I 2 of 5 functionality works as usual.
Recommendations for Length Setting
I 2 of 5 Length 1: Larger of the fixed length and the FEBRABAN length (==44). I 2 of 5 Length 2: Smaller of the fixed length and the FEBRABAN length (==44).
Enable Febraban (1)
*Disable Febraban
(0)
12 - 52 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
I 2 of 5 Security Level Parameter # 1121 SSI # F8h 04h 61h
I 2 of 5 bar codes are vulnerable to misdecodes, particularly when I 2 of 5 Lengths is set to Any Length. The scanner offers four levels of decode security for I 2 of 5 bar codes. There is an inverse relationship between security and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so select only the level of security necessary.
· I 2 of 5 Security Level 0: The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security in decoding most in-spec bar codes.
· I 2 of 5 Security Level 1: A bar code must be successfully read twice, and satisfy certain safety requirements before being decoded. This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.
· I 2 of 5 Security Level 2: This option applies greater bar code security requirements if Security Level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
· I 2 of 5 Security Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2, and misdecodes still occur, select this security level. The highest safety requirements are applied. A bar code must be successfully read three times before being decoded.
NOTE Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec bar codes, and significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve the quality of the bar codes.
I 2 of 5 Security Level 0 (0)
I 2 of 5 Security Level 2 (2)
*I 2 of 5 Security Level 1
(1)
I 2 of 5 Security Level 3 (3)
Symbologies 12 - 53
I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone Parameter # 1210 SSI # F8h 04h BAh
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable decoding I 2 of 5 bar codes with reduced quiet zones (the margins on either side of the bar code). If you select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 12-77.
Enable I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone (1)
*Disable I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone
(0)
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF/D 2 of 5)
Parameter # 5 SSI # 05h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable D 2 of 5.
Enable D 2 of 5 (1)
*Disable D 2 of 5
(0)
12 - 54 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5
L1 = Parameter # 20 SSI # 14h
L2 = Parameter # 21 SSI # 15h
NOTE The maximum number of 1D bar code characters readable with scanner depends on the type of symbology, type of characters (i.e., digits or letters), printing density, and quality. For reference, the DS2278 reads 3.1 in wide, 10mil 1D bar codes printed with 1200dpi resolution and 80% contrast.
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for D 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. Minimum and maximum length range is from 0 - 55. The default minimum and maximum length range is from 1 - 55.
NOTE When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following bar codes to select a length option:
· One Discrete Length - Decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Length Within Range - Decode D 2 of 5 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
Symbologies 12 - 55
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 (continued)
· Any Length - Decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner's capability. NOTE Due to the construction of the D 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent this, select specific lengths (D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for D 2 of 5 applications.
D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length
*D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range (Default: 1 - 55)
D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths D 2 of 5 - Any Length
12 - 56 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Codabar (NW - 7)
Parameter # 7 SSI # 07h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Codabar.
*Enable Codabar
(1)
Disable Codabar (0)
Set Lengths for Codabar L1 = Parameter # 24 SSI # 18h L2 = Parameter # 25 SSI # 19h
NOTE The maximum number of 1D bar code characters readable with scanner depends on the type of symbology, type of characters (i.e., digits or letters), printing density, and quality. For reference, the DS2278 reads 3.1 in wide, 10mil 1D bar codes printed with 1200dpi resolution and 80% contrast.
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Codabar to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. Minimum and maximum length range is from 0 - 55. The default minimum and maximum length range is from 4 - 55.
NOTE When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Symbologies 12 - 57
Set Lengths for Codabar (continued)
Scan one of the following bar codes to select a length option:
· One Discrete Length - Decode only Codabar symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols with 14 characters, scan Codabar - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Codabar symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Length Within Range - Decode Codabar symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Codabar symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan Codabar - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Any Length - Decode Codabar symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner's capability.
Codabar - One Discrete Length
*Codabar - Length Within Range (Default: 4 - 55)
Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths Codabar - Any Length
12 - 58 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
CLSI Editing Parameter # 54 SSI # 36h
Scan Enable CLSI Editing to strip the start and stop characters and insert a space after the first, fifth, and tenth characters of a 14-character Codabar symbol if the host system requires this data format.
NOTE Symbol length does not include start and stop characters.
Enable CLSI Editing (1)
*Disable CLSI Editing
(0)
NOTIS Editing Parameter # 55 SSI # 37h
Scan Enable NOTIS Editing to strip the start and stop characters from a decoded Codabar symbol if the host system requires this data format.
Enable NOTIS Editing (1)
*Disable NOTIS Editing
(0)
Symbologies 12 - 59
Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/Stop Characters Parameter # 855 SSI # F2h 57h
Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether to transmit upper case or lower case Codabar start/stop characters.
Lower Case (1)
MSI
Parameter # 11 SSI # 0Bh
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable MSI.
*Upper Case
(0)
Enable MSI (1)
*Disable MSI
(0)
12 - 60 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Set Lengths for MSI
L1 = Parameter # 30 SSI # 1Eh
L2 = Parameter # 31 SSI # 1Fh
NOTE The maximum number of 1D bar code characters readable with scanner depends on the type of symbology, type of characters (i.e., digits or letters), printing density, and quality. For reference, the DS2278 reads 3.1 in wide, 10mil 1D bar codes printed with 1200dpi resolution and 80% contrast.
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for MSI to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. Minimum and maximum length range is from 0 - 55. The default minimum and maximum length range is from 4 55.
NOTE When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following bar codes to select a length option:
· One Discrete Length - Decode only MSI symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only MSI symbols with 14 characters, scan MSI - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only MSI symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only MSI symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan MSI - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Length Within Range - Decode MSI symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode MSI symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan MSI - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
Symbologies 12 - 61
Set Lengths for MSI (continued)
· Any Length - Decode MSI symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner's capability. NOTE Due to the construction of the MSI symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent this, select specific lengths (MSI - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for MSI applications.
MSI - One Discrete Length
*MSI - Length Within Range (Default: 4 - 55)
MSI - Two Discrete Lengths MSI - Any Length
12 - 62 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
MSI Check Digits Parameter # 50 SSI # 32h
With MSI symbols, one check digit is mandatory and always verified by the reader. The second check digit is optional. If the MSI codes include two check digits, scan the Two MSI Check Digits bar code to enable verification of the second check digit. See MSI Check Digit Algorithm on page 12-63 to select second digit algorithms.
*One MSI Check Digit
(0)
Two MSI Check Digits (1)
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) Parameter # 46 SSI # 2Eh
Scan one of the following bar codes to transmit MSI data with or without the check digit.
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Enable) (1)
*Do Not Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Disable)
(0)
Symbologies 12 - 63
MSI Check Digit Algorithm Parameter # 51 SSI # 33h
Two algorithms are available for verifying the second MSI check digit. Scan one of the following bar codes to select the algorithm used to encode the check digit.
MOD 11/MOD 10 (0)
*MOD 10/MOD 10
(1)
MSI Reduced Quiet Zone Parameter # 1392 SSI # F8h 05h 70h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable decoding MSI bar codes with reduced quiet zones. If enabled select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 12-77.
*Disable MSI Reduced Quiet Zone
(0)
Enable MSI Reduced Quiet Zone (1)
12 - 64 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Chinese 2 of 5
Parameter # 408 SSI # F0h 98h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Chinese 2 of 5.
Enable Chinese 2 of 5 (1)
*Disable Chinese 2 of 5
(0)
Matrix 2 of 5
Parameter # 618 SSI # F1h 6Ah
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Matrix 2 of 5.
Enable Matrix 2 of 5 (1)
*Disable Matrix 2 of 5
(0)
Symbologies 12 - 65
Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5
L1 = Parameter # 619 SSI # F1h 6Bh
L2 = Parameter # 620 SSI # F1h 6Ch
NOTE The maximum number of 1D bar code characters readable with scanner depends on the type of symbology, type of characters (i.e., digits or letters), printing density, and quality. For reference, the DS2278 reads 3.1 in wide, 10mil 1D bar codes printed with 1200dpi resolution and 80% contrast.
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. Minimum and maximum length range is from 0 - 55. The default minimum and maximum length range is from 4 - 55.
NOTE When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following bar codes to select a length option:
· One Discrete Length - Decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
· Length Within Range - Decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the bar codes in Appendix G, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page G-3.
12 - 66 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 (continued)
· Any Length - Decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner's capability.
Matrix 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length
*Matrix 2 of 5 - Length Within Range (Default 4 - 55)
Matrix 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths Matrix 2 of 5 - Any Length
Symbologies 12 - 67
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Parameter # 622 SSI # F1h 6Eh
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following bar codes to determine whether to include the Matrix 2 of 5 check digit with the bar code data.
Enable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit (1)
*Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
(0)
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Parameter # 623 SSI # F1h 6Fh
Scan one of the following bar codes to transmit Matrix 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit (1)
*Do Not Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
(0)
12 - 68 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Korean 3 of 5
Parameter # 581 SSI # F1h 45h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Korean 3 of 5. NOTE The length for Korean 3 of 5 is fixed at 6.
Enable Korean 3 of 5 (1)
*Disable Korean 3 of 5
(0)
Symbologies 12 - 69
Inverse 1D
Parameter # 586 SSI # F1h 4Ah
Scan one of the following bar codes to set the 1D inverse decoder setting: · Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular 1D bar codes only. · Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse 1D bar codes only. · Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse 1D bar codes. NOTE This parameter does not apply to GS1 DataBar code types.
*Regular
(0)
Inverse Autodetect (2)
Inverse Only (1)
12 - 70 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
GS1 DataBar
The variants of GS1 DataBar are DataBar-14, DataBar Expanded, and DataBar Limited. The limited and expanded versions have stacked variants. Scan the appropriate bar codes to enable or disable each variant of GS1 DataBar.
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14), GS1 DataBar Truncated, GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional Parameter # 338 SSI # F0h 52h
*Enable GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
(1)
GS1 DataBar Limited Parameter # 339 SSI # F0h 53h
Disable GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (0)
*Enable GS1 DataBar Limited
(1)
Disable GS1 DataBar Limited (0)
GS1 DataBar Expanded, GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked Parameter # 340 SSI # F0h 54h
Symbologies 12 - 71
*Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded
(1)
Disable GS1 DataBar Expanded (0)
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN Parameter # 397 SSI # F0h, 8Dh
This parameter only applies to GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional and GS1 DataBar Limited symbols not decoded as part of a Composite symbol. Scan Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN to strip the leading '010' from DataBar-14 and DataBar Limited symbols encoding a single zero as the first digit, and report the bar code as EAN-13. For bar codes beginning with between two and five zeros, this strips the leading '0100' and reports the bar code as UPC-A. The UPC-A Preamble option that transmits the system character and country code applies to converted bar codes. Note that neither the system character nor the check digit can be stripped.
Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN (1)
*Disable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN
(0)
12 - 72 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Parameter # 728 SSI # F1h D8h
The decoder offers four levels of margin check for GS1 DataBar Limited bar codes. There is an inverse relationship between level of margin check and decoder aggressiveness. Increasing the level of margin check may result in reduced aggressiveness in scanning, so only choose the level of margin check necessary.
· Level 1: No clear margin required. This complies with the original GS1 standard, yet might result in erroneous decoding of the DataBar Limited bar code when scanning some UPC symbols that start with the digits 9 and 7.
· Level 2: Automatic risk detection. This level of security may result in erroneous decoding of DataBar Limited bar codes when scanning some UPC symbols. If a misdecode is detected, the decoder operates in Level 3 or Level 1.
· Level 3: Margin check level reflects newly proposed GS1 standard that requires a 5x trailing clear margin. · Level 4: Margin check level extends beyond the standard required by GS1. This level of security requires a
5x leading and trailing clear margin.
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 1 (1)
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 2 (2)
*GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 3
(3)
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 4 (4)
Symbologies 12 - 73
GS1 DataBar Security Level
Parameter # 1706
SSI # F8h 06h AAh
The decoder offers four levels of decode security for GS1 DataBar (GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBar Limited, GS1 DataBar Expanded) bar codes.
· Security Level 0: This setting allows the digital scanner to operate in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security in decoding most in-spec bar codes.
· Security Level 1: This setting eliminates most misdecodes while maintaining reasonable aggressiveness (default).
· Security Level 2: This setting allows greater bar code security requirements if Security Level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
· Security Level 3: This setting applies the highest safety requirements. Select if Security Level 2 was applied and misdecodes still occur.
Security Level 0 (0)
Security Level 2 (2)
* Security Level 1
(1)
Security Level 3 (3)
12 - 74 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Symbology-Specific Security Features
Redundancy Level Parameter # 78 SSI # 4Eh
The scanner offers four levels of decode redundancy. Select higher redundancy levels for decreasing levels of bar code quality. As redundancy levels increase, the scanner's aggressiveness decreases. Scan one of the following bar codes to select the redundancy level appropriate for the bar code quality:
· Redundancy Level 1 - The scanner must read the following code types twice before decoding: · Codabar (8 characters or less) · MSI (4 characters or less) · D 2 of 5 (8 characters or less) · I 2 of 5 (8 characters or less)
· Redundancy Level 2 - The scanner must read all code types twice before decoding. · Redundancy Level 3 - The scanner must read code types other than the following twice before decoding, but
must read the following codes three times: · Codabar (8 characters or less) · MSI (4 characters or less) · D 2 of 5 (8 characters or less) · I 2 of 5 (8 characters or less) · Redundancy Level 4 - The scanner must read all code types three times before decoding.
Redundancy Level (continued)
*Redundancy Level 1
(1)
Redundancy Level 3 (3)
Symbologies 12 - 75
Redundancy Level 2 (2)
Redundancy Level 4 (4)
12 - 76 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Security Level
Parameter # 77
SSI # 4Dh
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for delta bar codes, which include the Code 128 family, UPC/EAN/JAN, and Code 93. Select increasing levels of security for decreasing levels of bar code quality. There is an inverse relationship between security and scanner aggressiveness, so choose only that level of security necessary for the application.
· Security Level 0 - The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security decoding most "in-spec" bar codes.
· Security Level 1 - This default setting eliminates most misdecodes. · Security Level 2 - Select this option if Security Level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes. · Security Level 3 - If you selected Security Level 2 and misdecodes still occur, select this security level.
NOTE Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec bar codes, and significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve the quality of the bar codes.
Security Level 0 (0)
Security Level 2 (2)
*Security Level 1
(1)
Security Level 3 (3)
Symbologies 12 - 77
1D Quiet Zone Level
Parameter # 1288
SSI # F8h 05h 08h
This feature sets the level of aggressiveness when decoding bar codes with a reduced quiet zone (the margin on either side of a bar code), and applies to symbologies enabled by a Reduced Quiet Zone parameter. Because higher levels increase the decoding time and risk of misdecodes, Zebra strongly recommends enabling only the symbologies which require higher quiet zone levels, and leaving Reduced Quiet Zone disabled for all other symbologies. Options are:
· 1D Quiet Zone Level 0 - The scanner performs normally in terms of quiet zone. · 1D Quiet Zone Level 1 - The scanner performs more aggressively in terms of quiet zone. · 1D Quiet Zone Level 2 - The scanner only requires a quiet zone at the end of bar code for decoding. · 1D Quiet Zone Level 3 - The scanner decodes anything in terms of quiet zone or end of bar code.
1D Quiet Zone Level 0 (0)
1D Quiet Zone Level 2 (2)
*1D Quiet Zone Level 1
(1)
1D Quiet Zone Level 3 (3)
12 - 78 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Intercharacter Gap Size Parameter # 381 SSI # F0h, 7Dh
The Code 39 and Codabar symbologies have an intercharacter gap that is typically quite small. Due to various bar code printing technologies, this gap can grow larger than the maximum size allowed, preventing the scanner from decoding the symbol. If this problem occurs, scan the Large Intercharacter Gaps parameter to tolerate these out-of-specification bar codes.
*Normal Intercharacter Gaps
(6)
Large Intercharacter Gaps (10)
Composite
Composite CC-C Parameter # 341 SSI # F0h 55h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC-C.
Enable CC-C (1)
*Disable CC-C
(0)
Symbologies 12 - 79
Composite CC-A/B Parameter # 342 SSI # F0h 56h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC-A/B.
Enable CC-A/B (1)
*Disable CC-A/B
(0)
Composite TLC-39 Parameter # 371 SSI # F0h 73h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type TLC-39.
Enable TLC39 (1)
*Disable TLC39
(0)
12 - 80 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Composite Inverse Parameter # 1113 SSI # F8h 04h 59h
This parameter sets Composite for either regular decode or inverse decode. This mode only supports Inverse Composite that has DataBar combined with CCAB. No other 1D/2D combinations.
· Regular Only: The digital scanner decodes regular Composite bar codes only. (default). · Inverse Only: The digital scanner decodes inverse Composite bar codes only. For this parameter to work as
expected, Composite CC-A/B on page 12-79 and corresponding 1D Inverse or 1D Inverse Autodetect (page 12-69) must be enabled.
NOTE To decode regular Composite, Composite Inverse must be set to Regular Only and Inverse 1D must be set to Regular Only or Autodetect.
To decode inverse Composite, Composite Inverse must be set to Inverse Only and Inverse 1D must be set to Inverse Only or Autodetect.
* Regular Only
(0)
Inverse Only (1)
Symbologies 12 - 81
UPC Composite Mode Parameter # 344 SSI # F0h 58h
Select an option for linking UPC symbols with a 2D symbol during transmission as if they were one symbol: · UPC Never Linked - Transmit UPC bar codes regardless of whether a 2D symbol is detected. · UPC Always Linked - Transmit UPC bar codes and the 2D portion. If 2D is not present, do not transmit the bar code. · Autodiscriminate UPC Composites - The scanner determines if there is a 2D portion, then transmits the UPC, as well as the 2D portion if present.
*UPC Never Linked
(0)
UPC Always Linked (1)
Autodiscriminate UPC Composites (2)
12 - 82 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Composite Beep Mode Parameter # 398 SSI # F0h, 8Eh
Scan one of the following bar codes to select the number of decode beeps that sound upon decoding a Composite bar code.
Single Beep After Both are Decoded (0)
*Beep as Each Code Type is Decoded
(1)
Double Beep After Both are Decoded (2)
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes Parameter # 427 SSI # F0h, ABh
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable this mode.
Enable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes (1)
*Disable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for
UCC/EAN Composite Codes (0)
2D Symbologies
PDF417 Parameter # 15 SSI # 0Fh
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable PDF417.
Symbologies 12 - 83
*Enable PDF417
(1)
Disable PDF417 (0)
MicroPDF417 Parameter # 227 SSI # E3h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable MicroPDF417.
Enable MicroPDF417 (1)
*Disable MicroPDF417
(0)
12 - 84 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Code 128 Emulation Parameter # 123 SSI # 7Bh
Enable this parameter to transmit data from certain MicroPDF417 symbols as Code 128. You must enable AIM Code Identifiers on page E-3 for this parameter to work. Enable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes:
]C1 if the first codeword is 903-905 ]C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 ]C0 if the first codeword is 910 or 911 Disable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes: ]L3 if the first codeword is 903-905 ]L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 ]L5 if the first codeword is 910 or 911 Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Code 128 Emulation.
NOTE Linked MicroPDF codewords 906, 907, 912, 914, and 915 are not supported. Use GS1 Composites instead.
Enable Code 128 Emulation (1)
*Disable Code 128 Emulation
(0)
Data Matrix Parameter # 292 SSI # F0h, 24h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Data Matrix.
Symbologies 12 - 85
*Enable Data Matrix
(1)
Disable Data Matrix (0)
GS1 Data Matrix Parameter # 1336 SSI # F8h 05h 38h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable GS1 Data Matrix.
Enable GS1 Data Matrix (1)
*Disable GS1 Data Matrix
(0)
12 - 86 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Data Matrix Inverse Parameter # 588 SSI # F1h 4Ch
Scan one of the following bar codes to select the Data Matrix inverse decoder setting: · Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Data Matrix bar codes only. · Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Data Matrix bar codes only. · Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Data Matrix bar codes.
Regular Only (0)
*Inverse Autodetect (2)
Inverse Only (1)
Symbologies 12 - 87
Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images Parameter # 537 SSI # F1h 19h
Scan one of the following bar codes to select an option for decoding mirror image Data Matrix bar codes: · Never - Do not decode Data Matrix bar codes that are mirror images. · Always - Decode only Data Matrix bar codes that are mirror images. · Auto - Decode both mirrored and unmirrored Data Matrix bar codes.
Never (0)
*Auto
(2)
Always (1)
12 - 88 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Maxicode Parameter # 294 SSI # F0h, 26h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Maxicode.
Enable Maxicode (1)
*Disable Maxicode
(0)
QR Code Parameter # 293 SSI # F0h, 25h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable QR Code.
*Enable QR Code
(1)
Disable QR Code (0)
GS1 QR Parameter # 1343 SSI # F8h 05h 3Fh
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable GS1 QR.
Symbologies 12 - 89
Enable GS1 QR (1)
*Disable GS1 QR
(0)
MicroQR Parameter # 573 SSI # F1h 3Dh
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable MicroQR.
*Enable MicroQR
(1)
Disable MicroQR (0)
12 - 90 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Aztec Parameter # 574 SSI # F1h 3Eh
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Aztec. NOTE Enabling this also enables Linked Aztec.
*Enable Aztec
(1)
Disable Aztec (0)
Symbologies 12 - 91
Aztec Inverse Parameter # 589 SSI # F1h 4Dh
Scan one of the following bar codes to select the Aztec inverse decoder setting: · Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Aztec bar codes only. · Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Aztec bar codes only. · Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Aztec bar codes.
Regular Only (0)
*Inverse Autodetect (2)
Inverse Only (1)
12 - 92 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Han Xin Parameter # 1167 SSI # F8h 04h 8Fh
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Han Xin.
Enable Han Xin (1)
*Disable Han Xin
(0)
Han Xin Inverse Parameter # 1168 SSI # F8h 04h 90h
Scan one of the following bar codes to select a Han Xin inverse decoder setting: · Regular Only - The scanner decodes Han Xin bar codes with normal reflectance only. · Inverse Only - The scanner decodes Han Xin bar codes with inverse reflectance only. · Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Han Xin bar codes.
*Regular Only (0)
Inverse Autodetect (2)
Inverse Only (1)
Grid Matrix Parameter # 1718 SSI # F8h 06h B6h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Grid Matrix.
Symbologies 12 - 93
Enable (1)
*Disable
(0)
Grid Matrix Inverse Parameter # 1719 SSI # F8h 06h B7h
Scan one of the following bar codes to select a Grid Matrix inverse decoder setting: · Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Grid Matrix bar codes only. · Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Grid Matrix bar codes only. · Autodiscriminate - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Grid Matrix bar codes.
*Regular Only
(0)
Autodiscriminate (2)
Inverse Only (1)
12 - 94 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Grid Matrix Mirror Parameter # 1736 SSI # F8h 06h C8h
Scan one of the following bar codes to select a Grid Matrix mirror decoder setting: · Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Grid Matrix bar codes only. · Mirrored Only - The scanner decodes mirrored Grid Matrix bar codes only. · Auto-discriminate - The scanner decodes both regular and mirrored Grid Matrix bar codes.
*Regular Only
(0)
Autodiscriminate (2)
Mirrored Only (1)
Symbologies 12 - 95
Escape Characters Parameter # 233 SSI # E9h
This enables the backslash (\) character as an Escape character for systems that can process transmissions containing special data sequences. Scan one of the following bar codes to either format special data according to the GLI (Global Label Identifier) protocol, or to disable this parameter. This parameter only affects the data portion of a Macro PDF symbol transmission; the Macro PDF Control Header (if enabled) is always sent with GLI formatting.
GLI Protocol (2)
*None (0)
Flush Macro PDF Buffer
Scan the following bar code to flush the buffer of all decoded Macro PDF data stored to that point, transmit it to the host device, and abort from Macro PDF mode.
Flush Macro PDF Buffer
Abort Macro PDF Entry
Scan the following bar code to clear all currently-stored Macro PDF data in the buffer without transmission and abort from Macro PDF mode.
Abort Macro PDF Entry
12 - 96 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Postal Codes
US Postnet Parameter # 89 SSI # 59h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable US Postnet.
Enable US Postnet (1)
*Disable US Postnet
(0)
US Planet Parameter # 90 SSI # 5Ah
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable US Planet.
Enable US Planet (1)
*Disable US Planet
(0)
Symbologies 12 - 97
Transmit US Postal Check Digit Parameter # 95 SSI # 5Fh
Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether to transmit US Postal data, which includes both US Postnet and US Planet, with or without the check digit.
*Transmit US Postal Check Digit
(1)
Do Not Transmit US Postal Check Digit (0)
UK Postal Parameter # 91 SSI # 5Bh
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable UK Postal.
Enable UK Postal (1)
*Disable UK Postal
(0)
12 - 98 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit Parameter # 96 SSI # 60h
Scan one of the following bar codes to select whether to transmit UK Postal data with or without the check digit.
*Transmit UK Postal
Check Digit (1)
Do Not Transmit UK Postal Check Digit (0)
Japan Postal Parameter # 290 SSI # F0h, 22h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Japan Postal.
Enable Japan Postal (1)
*Disable Japan Postal
(0)
Australia Post Parameter # 291 SSI # F0h, 23h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Australia Post.
Symbologies 12 - 99
Enable Australia Post (1)
*Disable Australia Post
(0)
12 - 100 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Australia Post Format Parameter # 718 SSI # F1h, CEh
Scan one of the following bar codes to select a format for Australia Post: · Autodiscriminate (or Smart mode) - Decode the Customer Information Field using the N and C Encoding Tables. NOTE This option increases the risk of misdecodes because the encoded data format does not specify the Encoding Table used for encoding. · Raw Format - Output raw bar patterns as a series of numbers 0 through 3. · Alphanumeric Encoding - Decode the Customer Information Field using the C Encoding Table. · Numeric Encoding - Decode the Customer Information Field using the N Encoding Table.
For more information on Australia Post Encoding Tables, refer to the Australia Post Customer Barcoding Technical Specifications available at http://www.auspost.com.au.
*Autodiscriminate
(0)
Alphanumeric Encoding (2)
Raw Format (1)
Numeric Encoding (3)
Symbologies 12 - 101
Netherlands KIX Code Parameter # 326 SSI # F0h, 46h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Netherlands KIX Code.
Enable Netherlands KIX Code (1)
*Disable Netherlands KIX Code
(0)
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail Parameter # 592 SSI # F1h 50h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail.
Enable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail (1)
*Disable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
(0)
12 - 102 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
UPU FICS Postal Parameter # 611 SSI # F1h 63h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable UPU FICS Postal.
Enable UPU FICS Postal (1)
*Disable UPU FICS Postal
(0)
Mailmark Parameter # 1337 SSI # F8h 05h 39h
Scan one of the following bar codes to enable or disable Mailmark.
*Disable Mailmark (0)
Enable Mailmark (1)
CHAPTER 13 123SCAN AND SOFTWARE TOOLS
Introduction
This chapter briefly describes the Zebra software tools available for customizing scanner operation.
123Scan
123Scan is a software tool that simplifies scanner setup and more. Intuitive enough for first time users, the 123Scan wizard guides users through a streamlined setup process. Settings are saved in a configuration file that can be printed as a single programming bar code for scanning, emailed to a smart phone for scanning from its screen, or downloaded to the scanner using a USB cable. Through 123Scan a user can:
· Configure a scanner using a wizard · Program the following scanner settings: · Beeper tone / volume settings · Enable / disable symbologies · Communication settings · Modify data before transmission to a host using: · Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) - Scan one bar code per trigger pull
· Load parameter settings to a scanner via: · Bar code scanning: · Scan a paper bar code · Scan a bar code from a PC screen · Scan a bar code from a smart phone screen · Download over a USB cable: · Load settings to one scanner · Stage up to 10 scanners simultaneously
13 - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
· Validate scanner setup: · View scanned data within the utility's Data View screen · Capture an image and save to a PC · Review settings using the Parameter Report · Clone settings from an already deployed scanner
· Upgrade scanner firmware: · Load settings to one scanner · Stage up to 10 scanners simultaneously with a power USB hub
· Generate the following reports: · Parameter Report - Lists parameters programmed within a configuration file · Activity Report - Lists activities performed on a scanner(s) · Inventory Report - Lists scanner asset tracking information · Validation Report - Printout of scanned data
For more information go to: http://www.zebra.com/123Scan.
Communication with 123Scan
To communicate with the 123Scan program which runs on a host computer running a Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 8, and Windows 10 operating system use a USB cable to connect the scanner to the host computer.
123Scan Requirements
· Host computer with Windows XP, 7, 8, or 10 · Scanner · USB cable
123Scan Information
For more information on123Scan, go to: http://www.zebra.com/123Scan. For a 1 minute tour of 123Scan, go to: http://www.zebra.com/ScannerHowToVideos.
123Scan and Software Tools 13 - 3
Scanner SDK, Other Software Tools, and Videos
Tackle all your scanner programming needs with our diversified set of software tools. Whether you need to simply stage a device, or develop a fully featured application with image and data capture as well as asset management, these tools help you every step of the way. To download any of the following free tools, go to: http://www.zebra.com/scannersoftware.
· 123Scan configuration utility (described in this chapter). · Scanner SDKs. · Scanner Control App (available on Android Play, iOS App stores, and Zebra AppGallery).
· This app provides an option to update firmware on your Bluetooth connected scanner. · How-to videos. · Virtual COM port driver. · OPOS driver. · JPOS driver.
NOTE For a list of SDK supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see Appendix J, Communication Protocol Functionality.
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF)
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) is a means of customizing data before transmission to the host device. Use ADF to edit scan data to suit requirements. Implement ADF by scanning a related series of bar codes which program the scanner with ADF rules. To watch a video on Creating an Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) Rule, go to: http:www.zebra.com/ScannerHowToVideos. For information and programming bar codes for ADF, refer to the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.
13 - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
APPENDIX A STANDARD DEFAULT PARAMETERS
Table A-1 Parameter Defaults
Parameter
HID Device Conversion Shutting Off the Digital Scanner Battery Report Software Version Bar Code Radio Communications Radio Communications Host Types
Bluetooth Friendly Name Discoverable Mode Wi-Fi Friendly Mode Wi-Fi Friendly Channel Exclusion Radio Output Power Link Supervision Timeout Bluetooth Radio State Bluetooth HID - Wait for Connection Apple iOS Virtual Keyboard Toggle HID Keyboard Keystroke Delay HID CAPS Lock Override HID Ignore Unknown Characters Emulate Keypad
Parameter Number
N/A
N/A
SSI Number
Default
N/A
Scanner as CDC Device
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
607 610 1299 N/A 1324 1698 1354 1714 1114 N/A N/A N/A N/A
N/A
Cradle Bluetooth Classic
(Cradle Host)
F1h 5Fh
N/A
F1h 62h
General
F8h 05h 77h Disable
N/A
Use All Channels
F8h 05h 2Ch Medium Power Setting
F8h 06h A2h 5 sec
F8h 05h 4Ah On
F8h 06h B2h Disable
F8h 04h 5Ah Disable
N/A
No Delay (0 msec)
N/A
Disable
N/A
Enable
N/A
Enable
Page Number 1-6 1-7
3-7
5-4
5-9 5-10 5-11 5-11 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-17 5-18 5-18
A - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number
Fast HID Keyboard
1361
Quick Keypad Emulation
1362
HID Keyboard FN1 Substitution
N/A
HID Function Key Mapping
N/A
Simulated Caps Lock
N/A
Convert Case
N/A
Reconnect Attempt Beep Feedback 559
Reconnect Attempt Interval
558
Auto-Reconnect
604
Beep on Insertion
288
Beep on <BEL>
150
Pairing Modes
542
Pairing on Contacts
545
Toggle Pairing
1322
Connection Maintenance Interval
N/A
Batch Mode
544
Persistent Batch Storage
1399
Bluetooth Classic and/or Low Energy 1355 (Cradle Parameter Only/Cradle Host Only)
PIN Code (Set and Store)
552
Variable Pin Code
608
Bluetooth Security Levels Save Bluetooth Connection Information User Preferences Set Default Parameter Parameter Bar Code Scanning Beep After Good Decode Beeper Volume
1393 1743
N/A 236 56 140
SSI Number
Default
F8h 05h 51h Enable
F8h 05h 52h Enable
N/A
Disable
N/A
Disable
N/A
Disable
N/A
No Case Conversion
F1h 2Fh
Disable
F1h 2Eh
30 sec
F1h 5Ch
Auto-Reconnect Immediately
20h
Enable
96
Enable
F1h 1Eh
Unlocked
F1h 21h
Enable
F8h 05h 2Ah Disable
N/A
15 Minutes
F1h 20h
Normal (Do Not Batch Data)
F8h 05h 77h Disable
F8h 05h 4Bh Classic and Low Energy
F1h 28h
12345
F1h 60h
Static (Default PIN code is 12345)
F8h 05h 71h Low
F8h 06h CFh Enable
N/A
N/A
ECh
Enable
38h
Enable
8Ch
High
Page Number 5-19 5-19 5-20 5-20 5-21 5-21 5-22 5-23 5-24 5-25 5-25 5-26 5-27 5-28 5-29 5-31 5-34 5-34
5-35 5-36
5-36 5-40
4-5 4-6 4-6 4-7
Standard Default Parameters A - 3
Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number
Beeper Tone
145
Beeper Duration
628
Suppress Power Up Beeps
721
Direct Decode Indicator
859
Low Power Mode
128
Time Delay to Low Power Mode
146
Timeout to Low Power Mode from
729
Auto Aim
Battery Preservation Mode
1765
Trigger Mode (or Hand-Held Trigger 138 Mode)
Hands-Free Mode
630
Hand-Held Decode Aiming Pattern 306
Hands-Free (Presentation) Decode 590 Aiming Pattern
Picklist Mode
402
Continuous Bar Code Read
649
Unique Bar Code Reporting
723
Decode Session Timeout
136
Hands-Free Decode Session Timeout 400
Timeout Between Decodes, Same 137 Symbol
Timeout Between Decodes, Different 144 Symbols
Decode Mirror Images (Data Matrix 537 Only)
Mobile Phone/Display Mode
N/A
PDF Prioritization
719
PDF Prioritization Timeout
720
Decoding Illumination
298
Illumination Brightness
669
SSI Number
Default
91h F1h 74h F1h D1h F2h 5Bh 80h 92h F1h D9h
Medium Medium Do Not Suppress Disable Enable 100 msec 15 sec
Page Number 4-8 4-9 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-14
F8h 06h E5h Enable
8Ah
Standard (Level)
4-15 4-16
F1h 76h F0h 32h F1h 4Eh
F0h 92h F1h 89h F1h D3h 88h F0 90 89h
Enable
4-17
Enable
4-18
Enable Hands-Free
4-19
(Presentation) Decode Aiming
Pattern on PDF
Disable Picklist Mode Always 4-20
Disable
4-21
Enable
4-21
9.9 Seconds
4-22
15
4-22
0.5 Seconds
4-23
90h
0.1 Seconds
4-23
F1h 19h
Auto
4-24
N/A F1h CFh F1h D0h F0h 2Ah F1h 9Dh
N/A Disable 200 ms Enable High
4-24 4-25 4-25 4-26 4-26
A - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number
Low Light Scene Detection
810
Motion Tolerance (Hand-Held Trigger 858 Mode Only)
Product ID (PID) Type
1281
Product ID (PID) Value
1725
ECLevel
1710
Miscellaneous Options
Enter Key
N/A
Tab Key
N/A
Transmit Code ID Character
45
Prefix Value
99, 105
Suffix 1 Value Suffix 2 Value
98, 104 100, 106
Scan Data Transmission Format
235
FN1 Substitution Values
103, 109
Transmit "No Read" Message
94
Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval
1118
Send Versions
Software Version
N/A
Serial Number
N/A
Manufacturing Information
N/A
Signature Capture Preferences
Signature Capture
93
Signature Capture File Format
313
Selector
Signature Capture Bits per Pixel
314
(BPP)
Signature Capture Width
366
Signature Capture Height
367
Signature Capture JPEG Quality
421
SSI Number
Default
F2h 2Ah F2h 5Ah
Dim Illumination Low Light Assist Scene Detection
Less
F8h 05h 01h Host Type Unique F8h 06h BDh 0 F8h 06h AEh 0
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2Dh
None
63h, 69h
7013 <CR><LF>
62h, 68h 64h, 6Ah
7013 <CR><LF>
EBh
Data As Is
67h, 6Dh
7013 <CR><LF>
5E
Disable
F8h 04h 5Eh Disable
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
5Dh F0h 39h
Disable JPEG
F0h 3Ah
8 BPP
F4h F0h 6Eh 400
F4h F0h 6Fh 100
F0h A5h
65
Page Number 4-27
4-28
4-29 4-29 4-30
4-31 4-31 4-32 4-33 4-33
4-34 4-36 4-37 4-38
4-39 4-39 4-39
6-3 6-4
6-5
6-6 6-6 6-6
Standard Default Parameters A - 5
Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number
USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type
N/A
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status N/A Handshaking
Native Firmware Update
N/A
USB Keystroke Delay
N/A
USB CAPS Lock Override
N/A
Bar Codes With Unknown
N/A
Characters
USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 N/A
USB Fast HID
N/A
USB Polling Interval
N/A
Keypad Emulation
N/A
Quick Keypad Emulation
N/A
Keypad Emulation with Leading
N/A
Zero
USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution
N/A
Function Key Mapping
N/A
Simulated Caps Lock
N/A
Convert Case
N/A
USB Static CDC
N/A
CDC Beep on <BEL>
N/A
TGCS (IBM) USB Direct I/O Beep N/A
TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive
N/A
TGCS (IBM) USB Bar Code
N/A
Configuration Directive
TGCS (IBM) USB Specification
N/A
Version
SSI Host Parameters
Select SSI Host
N/A
Baud Rate
156
SSI Number
Default
N/A
USB Keyboard HID
N/A
Enable
N/A
Disable
N/A
No Delay
N/A
Disable
N/A
Enable
N/A
Disable
N/A
Enable
N/A
3 msec
N/A
Enable
N/A
Enable
N/A
Enable
N/A
Disable
N/A
Disable
N/A
Disable
N/A
None
N/A
Enable
N/A
Enable
N/A
Honor
N/A
Ignore
N/A
Ignore
N/A
Version 2.2
N/A
N/A
9Ch
9600
Page Number
7-5 7-7
7-7 7-8 7-8 7-9
7-9 7-9 7-11 7-13 7-13 7-14
7-14 7-15 7-15 7-16 7-16 7-17 7-17 7-18 7-18
7-19
8-12 8-12
A - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number
Parity
158
Check Parity
151
Stop Bits
157
Software Handshaking
159
Host RTS Line State
154
Decode Data Packet Format
238
Host Serial Response Timeout
155
Host Character Timeout
239
Multipacket Option
334
Interpacket Delay
335
Event Reporting
Decode Event
256
Boot Up Event
258
Parameter Event
259
RS-232 Host Parameters
RS-232 Host Types
N/A
Baud Rate
N/A
Parity
N/A
Stop Bits
N/A
Data Bits
N/A
Check Receive Errors
N/A
Hardware Handshaking
N/A
Software Handshaking
N/A
Host Serial Response Timeout
N/A
RTS Line State
N/A
Beep on <BEL>
N/A
Intercharacter Delay
N/A
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options
N/A
SSI Number
Default
9Eh 97h 9Dh 9Fh 9Ah EEh 9Bh EFh F0h 4Eh F0h 4Fh
None Disable 1 ACK/NAK Low Send Raw Decode Data 2 Seconds 200 msec Option 1 0 msec
F0h 00h F0h 02h F0h 03h
Disable Disable Disable
N/A
Standard
N/A
9600
N/A
None
N/A
1 Stop Bit
N/A
8-bit
N/A
Enable
N/A
None
N/A
None
N/A
2 Sec
N/A
Low RTS
N/A
Disable
N/A
0 msec
N/A
Normal Operation
Page Number 8-14 8-15 8-15 8-16 8-17 8-17 8-18 8-19 8-20 8-21
8-22 8-23 8-23
9-6 9-8 9-9 9-9 9-10 9-10 9-11 9-13 9-15 9-16 9-16 9-17 9-18
Standard Default Parameters A - 7
Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number
Bar Codes with Unknown Characters N/A
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters
Port Address
N/A
Convert Unknown to Code 39
N/A
RS-485 Beep Directive
N/A
RS-485 Bar Code Configuration
N/A
Directive
IBM-485 Specification Version
N/A
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Type
N/A
Bar Codes with Unknown Characters N/A
Keystroke Delay
N/A
Intra-keystroke Delay
N/A
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation N/A
Quick Keypad Emulation
N/A
Simulated Caps Lock
N/A
Caps Lock Override
N/A
Convert Case
N/A
Function Key Mapping
N/A
FN1 Substitution
N/A
Send Make and Break
N/A
Symbologies
Enable/Disable All Code Types
SSI Number
Default
N/A
Send Bar Code With
Unknown Characters
N/A
None
N/A
Disable
N/A
Ignore
N/A
Ignore
N/A
Original Specification
N/A
IBM AT Notebook
N/A
Send Bar Codes with
Unknown Characters
N/A
No Delay
N/A
Disable
N/A
Enable
N/A
Enable
N/A
Disable
N/A
Disable
N/A
Do Not Convert
N/A
Disable
N/A
Disable
N/A
Send
1D Symbologies UPC/EAN/JAN UPC-A UPC-E UPC-E1
1
01h
Enable
2
02h
Enable
12
0Ch
Disable
Page Number 9-18
10-4 10-5 10-5 10-6
10-6
11-4 11-4
11-5 11-5 11-6 11-6 11-7 11-7 11-8 11-8 11-9 11-9
12-8
12-9 12-9 12-10
A - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number
EAN-8/JAN 8
4
EAN-13/JAN 13
3
Bookland EAN
83
Bookland ISBN Format
576
ISSN EAN
617
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN
16
Supplementals
(2 and 5 digits)
User-Programmable Supplementals
Supplemental 1:
579
Supplemental 2:
580
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental
80
Redundancy
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN
672
Supplemental AIM ID Format
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
40
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
41
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
42
UPC-A Preamble
34
UPC-E Preamble
35
UPC-E1 Preamble
36
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A
37
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A
38
EAN/JAN Zero Extend
39
UCC Coupon Extended Code
85
Coupon Report
730
UPC Reduced Quiet Zone
1289
Code 128
Code 128
8
Set Lengths for Code 128
209, 210
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) 14
SSI Number
Default
04h 03h 53h F1h 40h F1h 69h 10h
Enable Enable Disable ISBN-10 Disable Ignore
000 F1h 43h F1h 44h
50h
10
F1h A0h
Combined
28h
Enable
29h
Enable
2Ah
Enable
22h
System Character
23h
System Character
24h
System Character
25h
Disable
26h
Disable
27h
Disable
55h
Disable
F1h DAh
New Coupon Format
F8h 05h 09h Disable
08h D1h, D2h 0Eh
Enable 1 - 55 Enable
Page Number 12-10 12-11 12-11 12-12 12-12 12-13
12-16
12-16
12-17
12-18 12-18 12-19 12-20 12-21 12-22 12-23 12-23 12-24 12-24 12-25 12-25
12-26 12-26 12-27
Standard Default Parameters A - 9
Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number
ISBT 128
84
ISBT Concatenation
577
Check ISBT Table
578
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy 223
Code 128 <FNC4>
1254
Code 128 Security Level
751
Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone
1208
Code 39
Code 39
0
Trioptic Code 39
13
Convert Code 39 to Code 32
86
(Italian Pharmacy Code)
Code 32 Prefix
231
Set Lengths for Code 39
18, 19
Code 39 Check Digit Verification
48
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit
43
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
17
Code 39 Security Level
750
Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone
1209
Code 93
Code 93
9
Set Lengths for Code 93
26, 27
Code 11
Code 11
10
Set Lengths for Code 11
28, 29
Code 11 Check Digit Verification
52
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s)
47
SSI Number
Default
54h
Disable
F1h 41h
Disable
F1h 42h
Enable
DFh
10
F8h 04h E6h Honor
F1h EFh
Security Level 1
F8h 04h B8h Disable
00h
Enable
0Dh
Disable
56h
Disable
E7h
Disable
12h, 13h
1 - 55
30h
Disable
2Bh
Disable
11h
Disable
F1h EEh
Security Level 1
F8h 04h B9h Disable
09h 1Ah, 1Bh
Enable 1 - 55
0Ah 1Ch, 1Dh 34h 2Fh
Disable 4 to 55 Disable Disable
Page Number 12-28 12-29 12-30 12-30 12-31 12-31 12-32
12-33 12-33 12-34
12-34 12-35 12-36 12-37 12-37 12-38 12-40
12-40 12-41
12-43 12-43 12-45 12-46
A - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
6
Set Lengths for I 2 of 5
22, 23
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification
49
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit
44
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13
82
Febraban
1750
I 2 of 5 Security Level
1121
I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone
1210
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
Discrete 2 of 5
5
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5
20, 21
Codabar (NW - 7)
Codabar
7
Set Lengths for Codabar
24, 25
CLSI Editing
54
NOTIS Editing
55
Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/ 855 Stop Characters Detection
MSI
MSI
11
Set Lengths for MSI
30, 31
MSI Check Digits
50
Transmit MSI Check Digit
46
MSI Check Digit Algorithm
51
MSI Reduced Quiet Zone
1392
Chinese 2 of 5
Chinese 2 of 5
408
SSI Number
Default
06h
Enable
16h, 17h
6 to 55
31h
Disable
2Ch
Disable
52h
Disable
F8h 06h D6h Disable
F8h 04h 61h Security Level 1
F8h 04h BAh
Disable
05h 14h 15h
Disable 1 to 55
07h 18h, 19h 36h 37h F2h 57h
Enable 4 to 55 Disable Disable Upper Case
0Bh
Disable
1Eh, 1Fh
4 to 55
32h
One
2Eh
Disable
33h
Mod 10/Mod 10
F8h 05h 70h Disable
F0h 98h
Disable
Page Number
12-46 12-47 12-49 12-50 12-50 12-51 12-52 12-53
12-53 12-54
12-56 12-56 12-58 12-58 12-59
12-59 12-60 12-62 12-62 12-63 12-63
12-64
Standard Default Parameters A - 11
Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number
Matrix 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5
618
Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5
619
Lengths
620
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
622
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 623
Korean 3 of 5
Korean 3 of 5
581
Inverse 1D
586
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
338
(formerly GS1 DataBar-14), GS1
DataBar Truncated, GS1 DataBar
Stacked, GS1 DataBar Stacked
Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Limited
339
GS1 DataBar Expanded, GS1
340
DataBar Expanded Stacked
Convert GS1 DataBar to
397
UPC/EAN/JAN
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check 728
GS1 DataBar Security Level
1706
Symbology-Specific Security Features
Redundancy Level
78
Security Level
77
1D Quiet Zone Level
1288
Intercharacter Gap Size
381
Composite Codes
Composite CC-C
341
Composite CC-A/B
342
Composite TLC-39
371
Composite Inverse
1113
SSI Number
Default
F1h 6Ah F1h 6Bh F1h 6Ch F1h 6Eh F1h 6Fh
Disable 4 to 55
Disable Disable
F1h 45h F1h 4Ah
Disable Regular
F0h 52h
Enable
F0h 53h F0h 54h
Enable Enable
F0h 8Dh
Disable
F1h D8h
Level 3
F8h 06h AAh Level 1
4Eh
1
4Dh
1
F8h 05h 08h 1
F0h 7Dh
Normal
F0h 55h
Disable
F0h 56h
Disable
F0h 73h
Disable
F8h 04h 59h Regular Only
Page Number
12-64 12-65 12-67 12-67
12-68 12-69
12-70
12-70 12-71 12-71 12-72 12-73
12-74 12-76 12-77 12-78
12-78 12-79 12-79 12-80
A - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number
UPC Composite Mode
344
Composite Beep Mode
398
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes 2D Symbologies PDF417 MicroPDF417 Code 128 Emulation Data Matrix GS1 Data Matrix Data Matrix Inverse Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images Maxicode QR Code GS1 QR MicroQR Aztec Aztec Inverse Han Xin Han Xin Inverse Grid Matrix Grid Matrix Inverse Grid Matrix Mirror Postal Codes US Postnet US Planet Transmit US Postal Check Digit UK Postal Transmit UK Postal Check Digit
427
15 227 123 292 1336 588 537 294 293 1343 573 574 589 1167 1168 1718 1719 1736
89 90 95 91 96
SSI Number
Default
F0h 58h F0h 8Eh
F0h ABh
UPC Never Linked
Beep As Each Code Type is Decoded
Disable
0Fh
Enable
E3h
Disable
7Bh
Disable
F0h 24h
Enable
F8h 05h 38h Disable
F1h 4Ch
Inverse Autodetect
F1h 19h
Auto
F0h 26h
Disable
F0h 25h
Enable
F8h 05h 3Fh Disable
F1h 3Dh
Enable
F1h 3Eh
Enable
F1h 4Dh
Inverse Autodetect
F8h 04h 8Fh Disable
F8h 04h 90h Regular
F8 06 B6
Disable
F8 06 B7
Regular Only
F8 06 C8
Regular Only
59h
Disable
5Ah
Disable
5Fh
Enable
5Bh
Disable
60h
Enable
Page Number 12-81 12-82
12-82
12-83 12-83 12-84 12-85 12-85 12-86 12-87 12-88 12-88 12-89 12-89 12-90 12-91 12-92 12-92 12-93 12-93 12-94
12-96 12-96 12-97 12-97 12-98
Standard Default Parameters A - 13
Table A-1 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter Number
Japan Postal
290
Australia Post
291
Australia Post Format
718
Netherlands KIX Code
326
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent
592
Mail
UPU FICS Postal
611
Mailmark
1337
Country Codes
USB and Keyboard Wedge Country N/A Keyboard Types
CJK Decode Control
CJK Control Parameters
N/A
SSI Number
Default
F0h 22h F0h 23h F1h CEh F0h 46h F1h 50h
Disable Disable Autodiscriminate Disable Disable
F1h 63h
Disable
F8h 05h 39h Disable
N/A
US English (North American)
N/A
Universal Output
Page Number 12-98 12-99 12-100 12-101 12-101
12-102 12-102
B-2
D-1
A - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
APPENDIX B COUNTRY CODES
Introduction
This chapter provides instructions for programming the keyboard to interface with a USB or keyboard wedge host. The host powers the scanner. For host setup information, see Chapter 7, USB Interface and Chapter 11, Keyboard Wedge Interface.
To select a code page for the country keyboard type, see Appendix B, Country Codes.
Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
*Indicates Default
*US English (North American)
Feature/Option
B - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
USB and Keyboard Wedge Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes)
Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type. For a USB host, this setting applies only to the USB Keyboard (HID) device. If the keyboard type is not listed, see Keypad Emulation on page 7-13 for the USB HID host. For a keyboard wedge host, see Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 11-6.
NOTE When changing USB country keyboard types the digital scanner automatically resets and issues the standard startup beep sequences.
NOTE For best results when using international keyboards, enable Quick Keypad Emulation on page 7-13.
IMPORTANT
1. Some country keyboard bar code types are specific to certain Windows Operating Systems (i.e., XP, and Win 7 or higher). Bar codes requiring a specific Windows OS are noted so in their bar code captions.
2. Use the French International bar code for Belgian French keyboards.
US English (Mac)
*US English (North American)
Arabic (101)
Albanian
Country Codes (Continued)
Arabic (102) AZERTY Azeri (Cyrillic) Bosnian (Latin)
Country Codes B - 3
Arabic (102) Azeri (Latin) Belarusian Bosnian (Cyrillic)
B - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Country Codes (Continued)
Bulgarian (Latin)
Bulgarian Cyrillic (Typewriter) (Bulgarian -Windows XP
Typewriter - Win 7 or higher)
Canadian French Win7
Canadian French (Legacy)
Canadian Multilingual Standard
Chinese (ASCII)
Country Codes (Continued)
Chinese (Simplified)* Croatian
Czech (Programmer) Danish
Country Codes B - 5
Chinese (Traditional)* *For CJK keyboard types, see Appendix D, CJK Decode Control.
Czech
Czech (QWERTY)
B - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Country Codes (Continued)
Dutch (Netherlands)
Estonian
Faeroese
Finnish
French (France) French (Canada) 95/98
French International (Belgian French)
Country Codes (Continued)
French (Canada) 2000/XP* *Note that there is also a country code bar code for Canadian Multilingual Standard on page B-4. Be sure to select the appropriate bar code for your host system.
German
Greek (220) Latin
Greek
Country Codes B - 7
Galician Greek Latin Greek (319) Latin
B - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Country Codes (Continued)
Greek (220) Greek (319)
Greek Polytonic Hebrew Israel
Hungarian Hungarian_101KEY
Icelandic
Country Codes (Continued)
Irish
Italian (142)
Japanese (SHIFT-JIS)* *For CJK keyboard types, see Appendix D, CJK Decode Control.
Korean (ASCII)
Country Codes B - 9
Italian Japanese (ASCII)
Kazakh
B - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Country Codes (Continued)
Korean (Hangul)* *For CJK keyboard types, see Appendix D, CJK Decode Control.
Kyrgyz
Latin American
Latvian
Latvian (QWERTY)
Lithuanian
Lithuanian (IBM)
Country Codes (Continued)
Macedonian (FYROM)
Mongolian
Polish (214)
Portuguese (Brazil) (Windows XP)
Country Codes B - 11
Maltese_47KEY Norwegian
Polish (Programmer)
B - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Country Codes (Continued)
Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT)
Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT2)
Portuguese (Portugal)
Romanian (Windows XP)
Romanian (Legacy) (Win 7 or higher)
Romanian (Standard) (Win 7 or higher)
Country Codes (Continued)
Russian Serbian (Latin)
Slovak
Country Codes B - 13
Romanian (Programmer) (Win 7 or higher)
Russian (Typewriter)
Serbian (Cyrillic)
B - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Country Codes (Continued)
Slovak (QWERTY) Slovenian
Spanish Spanish (Variation)
Swedish Swiss French
Swiss German
Country Codes (Continued)
Tatar Turkish F UK English US Dvorak
Country Codes B - 15
Thai (Kedmanee) Turkish Q Ukrainian
B - 16 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Country Codes (Continued)
US Dvorak Left US Dvorak Right
US International
Uzbek
Vietnamese
APPENDIX C COUNTRY CODE PAGES
Introduction
This chapter provides bar codes for selecting code pages for the country keyboard type selected in Appendix C, Country Code Pages. If the default code page in Table C-1 is appropriate for your selected country keyboard type, you do not need to scan a country code page bar code.
NOTE ADF rules can also specify a code page based on the symbology and other ADF criteria. Refer to the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.
Country Code Page Defaults
Table C-1 lists the code page default for each country keyboard.
Table C-1 Country Code Page Defaults Country Keyboard
US English (North American) US English (Mac) Albanian Arabic 101 Arabic 102 Arabic 102 AZERTY Azeri Latin Azeri Cyrillic Belarusian Bosnian Latin
Code Page Default Windows 1252 Mac CP10000 Windows 1250 Windows 1256 Windows 1256 Windows 1256 Windows 1254 Windows 1251 Windows 1251 Windows 1250
C - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table C-1 Country Code Page Defaults (Continued)
Country Keyboard
Code Page Default
Bosnian Cyrillic
Windows 1251
Bulgarian Latin
Windows 1250
Bulgarian Cyrillic
Windows 1251
Canadian French Win7
Windows 1252
Canadian French (Legacy)
Windows 1252
Canadian Multilingual
Windows 1252
Croatian
Windows 1250
Chinese ASCII
Windows 1252
Chinese (Simplified)
Windows 936, GBK
Chinese (Traditional)
Windows 950, Big5
Czech
Windows 1250
Czech Programmers
Windows 1250
Czech QWERTY
Windows 1250
Danish
Windows 1252
Dutch Netherland
Windows 1252
Estonian
Windows 1257
Faeroese
Windows 1252
Finnish
Windows 1252
French (France)
Windows 1252
French (Canada) 95/98
Windows 1252
French (Canada) 2000/XP
Windows 1252
French International (Belgian French)
Windows 1252
Galician
Windows 1252
German
Windows 1252
Greek Latin
Windows 1252
Greek220 Latin
Windows 1253
Greek319 Latin
Windows 1252
Greek
Windows 1253
Greek220
Windows 1253
Greek319
Windows 1253
Country Code Pages C - 3
Table C-1 Country Code Page Defaults (Continued)
Country Keyboard
Code Page Default
Greek Polytonic
Windows 1253
Hebrew Israel
Windows 1255
Hungarian
Windows 1250
Hungarian_101KEY
Windows 1250
Icelandic
Windows 1252
Irish
Windows 1252
Italian
Windows 1252
Italian_142
Windows 1252
Japanese ASCII
Windows 1252
Japanese (Shift-JIS)
Windows 932, Shift-JIS
Kazakh
Windows 1251
Korean ASCII
Windows 1252
Korean (Hangul)
Windows 949, Hangul
Kyrgyz Cyrillic
Windows 1251
Latin America
Windows 1252
Latvian
Windows 1257
Latvian QWERTY
Windows 1257
Lithuanian
Windows 1257
Lithuanian_IBM
Windows 1257
Macedonian -FYROM
Windows 1251
Maltese_47KEY
Windows 1252
Mongolian-Cyrillic
Windows 1251
Norwegian
Windows 1252
Polish_214
Windows 1250
Polish Programmer
Windows 1250
Portuguese Brazil
Windows 1252
Portuguese Brazilian ABNT
Windows 1252
Portuguese Brazilian ABNT2
Windows 1252
Portuguese Portugal
Windows 1252
Romanian
Windows 1250
C - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table C-1 Country Code Page Defaults (Continued)
Country Keyboard
Code Page Default
Romanian Legacy
Windows 1250
Romanian Standard
Windows 1250
Romanian Programmer
Windows 1250
Russian
Windows 1251
Russian Typewriter
Windows 1251
Serbian Latin
Windows 1250
Serbian Cyrillic
Windows 1251
Slovak
Windows 1250
Slovak QWERTY
Windows 1250
Slovenian
Windows 1250
Spanish
Windows 1252
Spanish Variation
Windows 1252
Swedish
Windows 1252
Swiss French
Windows 1252
Swiss German
Windows 1252
Tatar
Windows 1251
Thai-Kedmanee
Windows 874
Turkish F
Windows 1254
Turkish Q
Windows 1254
Ukrainian
Windows 1251
United Kingdom
Windows 1252
United States
Windows 1252
US Dvorak
Windows 1252
US Dvorak Left Hand
Windows 1252
US Dvorak Right Hand
Windows 1252
US International
Windows 1252
Uzbek Cyrillic
Windows 1251
Vietnamese
Windows 1258
Country Code Pages C - 5
Country Code Page Bar Codes
Scan the bar code corresponding to the country keyboard code page.
Windows 1250 Latin 2, Central European
Windows 1252 Latin 1, Western European
Windows 1254 Latin 5, Turkish
Windows 1251 Cyrillic, Slavic
Windows 1253 Greek
C - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Country Code Pages (Continued)
Windows 1255 Hebrew
Windows 1256 Arabic
Windows 1257 Baltic
Windows 1258 Vietnamese
Windows 874 Thai
Country Code Pages (Continued)
Windows 20866 Cyrillic KOI8-R
Windows 936 Simplified Chinese GBK
Windows 949 Korean Hangul
Country Code Pages C - 7
Windows 932 Japanese Shift-JIS
Windows 54936 Simplified Chinese GB18030
Windows 950 Traditional Chinese Big5
C - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Country Code Pages (Continued)
MS-DOS 437 Latin US
MS-DOS 737 Greek
MS-DOS 775 Baltic
MS-DOS 850 Latin 1
MS-DOS 852 Latin 2
Country Code Pages (Continued)
MS-DOS 855 Cyrillic
MS-DOS 860 Portuguese
MS-DOS 862 Hebrew
Country Code Pages C - 9
MS-DOS 857 Turkish
MS-DOS 861 Icelandic
C - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Country Code Pages (Continued)
MS-DOS 863 French Canada
MS-DOS 865 Nordic
MS-DOS 866 Cyrillic
MS-DOS 869 Greek 2
Country Code Pages (Continued)
ISO 8859-1 Latin 1, Western European
ISO 8859-3 Latin 3, South European
ISO 8859-5 Cyrillic
Country Code Pages C - 11
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2, Central European
ISO 8859-4 Latin 4, North European
C - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Country Code Pages (Continued)
ISO 8859-6 Arabic
ISO 8859-7 Greek
ISO 8859-8 Hebrew
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5, Turkish
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6, Nordic
Country Code Pages (Continued)
ISO 8859-11 Thai
ISO 8859-14 Latin 8, Celtic
ISO 8859-16 Latin 10, South-Eastern European
Country Code Pages C - 13
ISO 8859-13 Latin 7, Baltic
ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
C - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Country Code Pages (Continued)
UTF-8
UTF-16LE UTF-16 Little Endian
UTF-16BE UTF-16 Big Endian
Mac CP10000 Roman
APPENDIX D CJK DECODE CONTROL
Introduction
This appendix describes control parameters for CJK (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) bar code decode through USB HID Keyboard Emulation mode.
NOTE Because ADF does not support CJK character processing, there is no format manipulation for CJK output.
CJK Control Parameters
Unicode Output Control
Parameter # 973
For a Unicode encoded CJK bar code, select one of the following options for unicode output:
· Universal Output to Unicode and MBCS Application - This default method applies to Unicode and MBCS
expected applications, such as MS Word and Notepad on a Windows host. NOTE To support Unicode universal output, set up the registry table for the Windows host. See Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host on page D-6.
· Output to Unicode Application Only - This method applies only to Unicode expected applications, such as
MS Word and WordPad, but not Notepad.
*Universal Output (0)
Unicode Application Only (1)
D - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
CJK Output Method to Windows Host
Parameter # 972
For a national standard encoded CJK bar code, select one of the following options for CJK output to a Windows host:
· Universal CJK Output - This is the default universal CJK output method for US English IME or
Chinese/Japanese/Korean ASCII IME on a Windows host. This method converts CJK characters to Unicode and emulates the characters when transmitting to the host. Use the Unicode Output Control parameter to control Unicode output.
NOTE To support universal CJK output, set up the registry table for the Windows host. See Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host on page D-6.
· Other options for CJK output - With the following methods, the scanner sends the CJK character
hexadecimal internal code (Nei Ma) value to host, or converts the CJK character to Unicode and sends the hexadecimal Unicode value to host. When using these methods, the Windows host must select the corresponding IME to accept the CJK character. See Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host on page D-6. · Japanese Unicode Output · Simplified Chinese GBK Code Output · Simplified Chinese Unicode Output · Korean Unicode Code Output · Traditional Chinese Big5 Code Output (Windows XP) · Traditional Chinese Big5 Code Output (Windows 7) · Traditional Chinese Unicode Code Output (Windows XP) · Traditional Chinese Unicode Code Output (Windows 7)
NOTE The Unicode emulate output method depends on the host system (Windows XP or Windows 7).
*Universal CJK Output (0)
Japanese Unicode Output (34)
(for Japanese Unicode Output, select Simplified Chinese Unicode IME on the Windows host)
CJK Output Method to Windows Host (continued
CJK Decode Control D - 3
Chinese (Simplified) GBK Output (1)
Chinese (Simplified) Unicode Output (2)
Korean Unicode Output (50)
(for Korean Unicode Output, select Simplified Chinese Unicode IME on the Windows host)
Chinese (Traditional) Big5 Output (Windows XP) (17)
Chinese (Traditional) Big5 Output (Windows 7) (19)
Chinese (Traditional) Unicode Output (Windows XP) (18)
Chinese (Traditional) Unicode Output (Windows 7) (20)
D - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Non-CJK UTF Bar Code Output
Parameter # 960
Some country keyboard type layouts contain characters that do not exist in the default code page (see Country Keyboard Type Missing Characters on page D-5). Although the default code page can not encode these characters in a bar code, they can be encoded in the UTF-8 bar code. Scan this parameter bar code to output the Unicode values by emulation mode.
NOTE Use this special country keyboard type to decode the non-CJK UTF-8 bar code. After decoding, re-configure the scanner to use the original country keyboard type.
Use US English IME on Windows. See Unicode Output Control on page D-1.
Non-CJK UTF-8 Emulation Output
CJK Decode Control D - 5
Country Keyboard Type Missing Characters
Country keyboard type: Tatar, Uzbek, Mongolian, Kyrgyz, Kazakh and Azeri Default code page: CP1251 Missing characters:
Country keyboard type: Romanian (Standard) Default code page: CP1250 Missing characters:
Country keyboard type: Portuguese-Brazilian (ABNT), Portuguese-Brazilian (ABNT2)
Default code page: CP1252
Missing character:
D - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Country keyboard type: Azeri-Latin Default code page: CP1254 Missing characters: ,
Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host
This section describes how to set up CJK decode with a Windows host.
Setting Up the Windows Registry Table for Unicode Universal Output
To support the Unicode universal output method, set up the Windows host registry table as follows: 1. Select Start > Run > regedt32 to start the registry editor. 2. Under HKEY_Current_User\Control Panel\Input Method, set EnableHexNumpad to 1 as follows:
[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Control Panel\Input Method] "EnableHexNumpad"="1" If this key does not exist, add it as type REG_SZ (string value). 3. Reboot the computer to implement the registry change.
Adding CJK IME on Windows
To add the desired CJK input language: 1. Click Start > Control Panel. 2. If the Control Panel opens in category view, select Switch to Classic View in the top left corner. 3. Select Regional and Language Options. 4. Click the Language tab. 5. Under Supplemental Language Support, select the Install Files for East Asian Languages check box if not
already selected, and click Apply. This may require a Windows installation CD to install the required files. This step ensures that the East Asian Languages (CJK) are available. 6. Under Text Services and Input Language, click Details. 7. Under Installed Services, click Add. 8. In the Add Input Language dialog box, choose the CJK input language and keyboard layout or Input Method Editor (IME) to add. 9. Click OK twice. The language indicator appears in the system tray (at bottom right corner of the desktop by default). To switch between input languages (keyboard languages) select the language indicator in the system tray. 10. Select the language indicator in the system tray to select the desired country keyboard type. 11. Verify that the characters displayed on each country's keyboard appear.
CJK Decode Control D - 7
Selecting the Simplified Chinese Input Method on the Host
To select the Simplified Chinese input method:
· Select Unicode/GBK input on Windows XP: Chinese (Simplified) - NeiMa, then click the input bar to select
Unicode or GBK NeiMa input.
Or
· Select Unicode/GBK input on Windows7: Chinese (Simplified) - Microsoft Pinyin New Experience Input
Style, then select Tool Menu > Secondary Inputs > Unicode Input or GB Code Input.
D - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide Selecting the Traditional Chinese Input Method on the Host
To select the Traditional Chinese input method:
· Select Unicode input on Windows XP: Chinese (Traditional) - Unicode
· Select Big5 input on Windows XP: Chinese (Traditional) - Big5 Code
· Select Unicode/Big5 input on Windows 7: Chinese (Traditional) - New Quick. This option support both
Unicode and Big5 input.
APPENDIX E PROGRAMMING REFERENCE
Symbol Code Identifiers
Table E-1 Symbol Code Characters
Code Character
Code Type
A
UPC-A, UPC-E, UPC-E1, EAN-8, EAN-13
B
Code 39, Code 32
C
Codabar
D
Code 128, ISBT 128, ISBT 128 Concatenated
E
Code 93
F
Interleaved 2 of 5
G
Discrete 2 of 5, or Discrete 2 of 5 IATA
H
Code 11
J
MSI
K
GS1-128
L
Bookland EAN
M
Trioptic Code 39
N
Coupon Code
R
GS1 DataBar Family
S
Matrix 2 of 5
T
UCC Composite, TLC 39
U
Chinese 2 of 5
E - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table E-1 Symbol Code Characters (Continued)
Code Character
Code Type
V
Korean 3 of 5
X
ISSN EAN, PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417
z
Aztec, Aztec Rune
P00
Data Matrix
P01
QR Code, MicroQR
P02
Maxicode
P03
US Postnet
P04
US Planet
P05
Japan Postal
P06
UK Postal
P08
Netherlands KIX Code
P09
Australia Post
P0A
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
P0B
UPU FICS Postal
P0C
Mailmark
P0D
Grid Matrix, Grid Matrix Inverse, Grid Matrix Mirror
P0G
GS1 Data Matrix
P0H
Han Xin
P0Q
GS1 QR
P0X
Signature Capture
Programming Reference E - 3
AIM Code Identifiers
Each AIM Code Identifier contains the three-character string ]cm where:
] = Flag Character (ASCII 93) c = Code Character (see Table E-2) m = Modifier Character (see Table E-3)
Table E-2 Aim Code Characters
Code Character
Code Type
A
Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Code 32
C
Code 128, ISBT 128, ISBT 128 Concatenated, GS1-128,
Coupon (Code 128 portion)
d
Data Matrix, GS1 Data Matrix
E
UPC/EAN, Coupon (UPC portion)
e
GS1 DataBar Family
F
Codabar
G
Code 93
H
Code 11
h
Han Xin
I
Interleaved 2 of 5
L
PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417
L2
TLC 39
M
MSI
Q
QR Code, MicroQR, GS1 QR
S
Discrete 2 of 5, IATA 2 of 5
U
Maxicode
z
Aztec, Aztec Rune
X
Bookland EAN, ISSN EAN, Trioptic Code 39, Chinese 2 of 5,
Matrix 2 of 5, Korean 3 of 5, US Postnet, US Planet, UK Postal, Japan
Postal, Australia Post, Netherlands KIX Code, USPS 4CB/One Code/
Intelligent Mail, UPU FICS Postal, Mailmark, Signature Capture
]g
Grid Matrix, Grid Matrix Inverse, Grid Matrix Mirror
E - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
The modifier character is the sum of the applicable option values based on Table E-3.
Table E-3 Modifier Characters
Code Type
Option Value
Option
Code 39
0
No check character or Full ASCII processing.
1
Reader has checked one check character.
3
Reader has checked and stripped check character.
4
Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion.
5
Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and
checked one check character.
7
Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and
checked and stripped check character.
Example: A Full ASCII bar code with check character W, A+I+MI+DW, is transmitted as ]A7AIMID where 7 = (3+4).
Trioptic Code 39 0
No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Trioptic bar code 412356 is transmitted as ]X0412356
Code 128
0
Standard data packet, no Function code 1 in first symbol position.
1
Function code 1 in first symbol character position.
2
Function code 1 in second symbol character position.
Example: A Code (EAN) 128 bar code with Function 1 character FNC1 in the first
position, AIMID is transmitted as ]C1AIMID
I 2 of 5
0
No check digit processing.
1
Reader has validated check digit.
3
Reader has validated and stripped check digit.
Example: An I 2 of 5 bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]I04123
Codabar
0
No check digit processing.
1
Reader has checked check digit.
3
Reader has stripped check digit before transmission.
Example: A Codabar bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]F04123
Code 93
0
No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Code 93 bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as ]G0012345678905
MSI
0
Check digits are sent.
1
No check digit is sent.
Example: An MSI bar code 4123, with a single check digit checked, is transmitted as ]M14123
Programming Reference E - 5
Table E-3 Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type
Option Value
Option
D 2 of 5
0
No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A D 2 of 5 bar code 4123, is transmitted as ]S04123
UPC/EAN
0
Standard data packet in full EAN format, i.e. 13 digits for UPC-A, UPC-E, and EAN-13 (not including supplemental data).
1
Two digit supplemental data only.
2
Five digit supplemental data only.
3
Combined data packet comprising 13 digits from EAN-13, UPC-A
or UPC-E symbol and 2 or 5 digits from supplemental symbol.
4
EAN-8 data packet.
Example: A UPC-A bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as ]E00012345678905
Bookland EAN 0
No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Bookland EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0123456789X
ISSN EAN
0
No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: An ISSN EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0123456789X
Code 11
0
Single check digit
1
Two check digits
3
Check characters validated but not transmitted.
GS1 DataBar Family
No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0. GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional and GS1 DataBar Limited transmit with an Application Identifier "01". Note: In GS1-128 emulation mode, GS1 DataBar is transmitted using Code 128 rules (i.e., ]C1).
Example: A GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional bar code 0110012345678902 is transmitted as ]e00110012345678902.
E - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table E-3 Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type
Option Value
Option
EAN.UCC
Composites
(GS1 DataBar,
GS1-128,
0
2D portion of UPC composite)
1
Native mode transmission. Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules.
Standard data packet.
Data packet containing the data following an encoded symbol separator character.
2
Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism
character. The data packet does not support the ECI protocol.
3
Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism
character. The data packet supports the ECI protocol.
GS1-128 emulation Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules.
1
Data packet is a GS1-128 symbol (i.e., data is preceded with ]JC1).
PDF417,
0
Micro PDF417
Reader set to conform to protocol defined in 1994 PDF417 symbology specifications. Note: When this option is transmitted, the receiver cannot reliably determine whether ECIs have been invoked or whether data byte 92DEC has been doubled in transmission.
1
Reader set to follow the ECI protocol (Extended Channel
Interpretation). All data characters 92DEC are doubled.
2
Reader set for Basic Channel operation (no escape character
transmission protocol). Data characters 92DEC are not doubled. Note: When decoders are set to this mode, unbuffered Macro
symbols and symbols requiring the decoder to convey ECI escape
sequences cannot be transmitted.
3
The bar code contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword
is 903-907, 912, 914, 915.
4
The bar code contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword
is in the range 908-909.
5
The bar code contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword
is in the range 910-911.
Example: A PDF417 bar code ABCD, with no transmission protocol enabled, is transmitted as ]L2ABCD.
Programming Reference E - 7
Table E-3 Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type
Option Value
Option
Data Matrix
0
ECC 000-140, not supported.
1
ECC 200.
2
ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position.
3
ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position.
4
ECC 200, ECI protocol implemented.
5
ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position, ECI protocol implemented.
6
ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position, ECI protocol
implemented.
MaxiCode
0
Symbol in Mode 4 or 5.
1
Symbol in Mode 2 or 3.
2
Symbol in Mode 4 or 5, ECI protocol implemented.
3
Symbol in Mode 2 or 3, ECI protocol implemented in secondary
message.
QR Code
0
Model 1 symbol.
1
Model 2 / MicroQR symbol, ECI protocol not implemented.
2
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented.
3
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in
first position.
4
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in first
position.
5
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in
second position.
6
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in
second position.
Aztec
0
Aztec symbol.
C
Aztec Rune symbol.
Han Xin
0
Generic data, no special features are set. The transmitted data does not follow the AIM ECI protocol.
1
ECI protocol enabled. There is at least one ECI mode encoded.
Transmitted data must follow the AIM ECI protocol.
Grid Matrix, Grid 0 Matrix Inverse, Grid Matrix Mirror
No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
E - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
APPENDIX F SAMPLE BAR CODES
IMPORTANT To read a sample barcode the parameter must be enabled. To enable a parameter scan the appropriate enable barcode in Chapter 12, Symbologies.
UPC/EAN
UPC-A, 100%
0 12345 67890 5
UPC-A with 2-digit Add-on
34
0 12345 67890
F - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide UPC-A with 5-digit Add-on
98765
0 12345 67890
UPC-E
0 425261 4
UPC-E with 2-digit Add-on
98 0 425261
UPC/EAN (continued)
UPC-E with 5-digit Add-on
87654 0 425261
Sample Bar Codes F - 3
EAN-8
EAN-13, 100%
3 456789 012340
F - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide EAN-13 with 2-digit Add-on
12
3 456789 012340
EAN-13 with 5-digit Add-on
54321
3 456789 012340
Code 128
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
GS1-128
Code 39 Code 93
Sample Bar Codes F - 5
(01)94019097685457(13)170119(30)17
123ABC
F - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Code 11 with 2 Check Digits
2468101275
Interleaved 2 of 5
12345678901231
MSI with 2 Check Digits
123455834
Chinese 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 Korean 3 of 5
Sample Bar Codes F - 7
45454545454 223344 1400230
F - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14)
7612341562341
GS1 DataBar Truncated
GS1 DataBar Stacked
(01)00614141999996
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
Sample Bar Codes F - 9
GS1 DataBar Limited
F - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
GS1 DataBar (continued)
GS1 DataBar Expanded
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
2D Symbologies
PDF417
Data Matrix
Sample Bar Codes F - 11
F - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
2D Symbologies (continued)
GS1 Data Matrix
Maxicode
QR Code
2D Symbologies (continued)
GS1 QR
Sample Bar Codes F - 13
MicroQR
Aztec
0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789012345 6789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789
F - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
2D Symbologies (continued)
Han Xin
Postal Codes
US Postnet
UK Postal
Postal Codes (continued)
Japan Post
5008861
Australian Post
39549554
Sample Bar Codes F - 15
F - 16 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
APPENDIX G NUMERIC BAR CODES
Numeric Bar Codes
For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered bar code(s). 0 1 2 3
G - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Numeric Bar Codes (continued)
4 5
6 7
8 9
Cancel
To correct an error or change a selection, scan the bar code below.
Numeric Bar Codes G - 3
Cancel
G - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
APPENDIX H ALPHAUMERIC BAR CODES
Cancel
To correct an error or change a selection, scan the following bar code.
Cancel
H - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Bar Codes
Space #
$ %
* +
Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)
/ "
Alphaumeric Bar Codes H - 3
. ! &
H - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)
` (
) :
; <
Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)
= ? [
Alphaumeric Bar Codes H - 5
> @ \
H - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)
] ^
_ `
Alphaumeric Bar Codes H - 7
Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued
NOTE Do not confuse the following bar codes with those on the numeric keypad.
0 1
2 3
4 5
H - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)
6 8 End of Message
7 9 Cancel
Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)
A C E
Alphaumeric Bar Codes H - 9
B D F
H - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)
G H
I J
K L
Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)
M O Q
Alphaumeric Bar Codes H - 11
N P R
H - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)
S T
U V
W X
Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)
Y a c
Alphaumeric Bar Codes H - 13
Z b d
H - 14 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)
e f
g h
i j
Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)
k m o
Alphaumeric Bar Codes H - 15
l n p
H - 16 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)
q r
s t
u v
Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)
w y {
Alphaumeric Bar Codes H - 17
x z |
H - 18 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Alphanumeric Bar Codes (continued)
} ~
APPENDIX I ASCII CHARACTER SETS
NOTE For the Keyboard Wedge Interface, Code 39 Full ASCII interprets the bar code special character ($ + % /) preceding a Code 39 character and assigns an ASCII character value to the pair. For example, if you enable Code 39 Full ASCII and scan +B, it transmits as b, %J as ?, and %V as @. Scanning ABC%I outputs the keystroke equivalent of ABC >.
Table I-1 ASCII Character Set
ASCII Value (Prefix/Suffix Value for RS-232)
Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Char
Keystroke
ASCII Character (Applies to RS-232 Only)
1000
%U
CTRL 2
NUL
1001
$A
CTRL A
SOH
1002
$B
CTRL B
STX
1003
$C
CTRL C
ETX
1004
$D
CTRL D
EOT
1005
$E
CTRL E
ENQ
1006
$F
CTRL F
ACK
1007
$G
1008
$H
1009
$I
CTRL G CTRL H/BACKSPACE1 CTRL I/HORIZONTAL TAB1
BELL BCKSPC HORIZ TAB
1010
$J
CTRL J
LF/NW LN
1011
$K
CTRL K
VT
1012
$L
CTRL L
FF
1The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 7-15 or page 11-8. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
I - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table I-1 ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value (Prefix/Suffix Value for RS-232)
1013
Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Char
$M
Keystroke CTRL M/ENTER1
ASCII Character (Applies to RS-232 Only)
CR/ENTER
1014
$N
CTRL N
SO
1015
$O
CTRL O
SI
1016
$P
CTRL P
DLE
1017
$Q
CTRL Q
DC1/XON
1018
$R
CTRL R
DC2
1019
$S
CTRL S
DC3/XOFF
1020
$T
CTRL T
DC4
1021
$U
CTRL U
NAK
1022
$V
CTRL V
SYN
1023
$W
CTRL W
ETB
1024
$X
CTRL X
CAN
1025
$Y
CTRL Y
EM
1026
$Z
CTRL Z
SUB
1027
%A
CTRL [
ESC
1028
%B
CTRL \
FS
1029
%C
CTRL ]
GS
1030
%D
CTRL 6
RS
1031
%E
CTRL -
US
1032
Space
Space
Space
1033
/A
!
!
1034
/B
"
"
1035
/C
#
#
1036
/D
$
$
1037
/E
%
%
1038
/F
&
&
1039
/G
`
`
1The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 7-15 or page 11-8. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
ASCII Character Sets I - 3
Table I-1 ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value (Prefix/Suffix Value for RS-232)
Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Char
Keystroke
ASCII Character (Applies to RS-232 Only)
1040
/H
(
(
1041
/I
)
)
1042
/J
*
*
1043
/K
+
+
1044
/L
,
,
1045
-
-
-
1046
.
.
.
1047
/o
/
/
1048
0
0
0
1049
1
1
1
1050
2
2
2
1051
3
3
3
1052
4
4
4
1053
5
5
5
1054
6
6
6
1055
7
7
7
1056
8
8
8
1057
9
9
9
1058
/Z
:
:
1059
%F
;
;
1060
%G
<
<
1061
%H
=
=
1062
%I
>
>
1063
%J
?
?
1064
%V
@
@
1065
A
A
A
1066
B
B
B
1The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 7-15 or page 11-8. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
I - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table I-1 ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value (Prefix/Suffix Value for RS-232)
Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Char
Keystroke
ASCII Character (Applies to RS-232 Only)
1067
C
C
C
1068
D
D
D
1069
E
E
E
1070
F
F
F
1071
G
G
G
1072
H
H
H
1073
I
I
I
1074
J
J
J
1075
K
K
K
1076
L
L
L
1077
M
M
M
1078
N
N
N
1079
O
O
O
1080
P
P
P
1081
Q
Q
Q
1082
R
R
R
1083
S
S
S
1084
T
T
T
1085
U
U
U
1086
V
V
V
1087
W
W
W
1088
X
X
X
1089
Y
Y
Y
1090
Z
Z
Z
1091
%K
[
[
1092
%L
\
\
1093
%M
]
]
1The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 7-15 or page 11-8. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
ASCII Character Sets I - 5
Table I-1 ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value (Prefix/Suffix Value for RS-232)
Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Char
Keystroke
ASCII Character (Applies to RS-232 Only)
1094
%N
^
^
1095
%O
_
_
1096
%W
`
`
1097
+A
a
a
1098
+B
b
b
1099
+C
c
c
1100
+D
d
d
1101
+E
e
e
1102
+F
f
f
1103
+G
g
g
1104
+H
h
h
1105
+I
i
i
1106
+J
j
j
1107
+K
k
k
1108
+L
l
l
1109
+M
m
m
1110
+N
n
n
1111
+O
o
o
1112
+P
p
p
1113
+Q
q
q
1114
+R
r
r
1115
+S
s
s
1116
+T
t
t
1117
+U
u
u
1118
+V
v
v
1119
+W
w
w
1120
+X
x
x
1The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 7-15 or page 11-8. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
I - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table I-1 ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value (Prefix/Suffix Value for RS-232)
Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Char
Keystroke
ASCII Character (Applies to RS-232 Only)
1121
+Y
y
y
1122
+Z
z
z
1123
%P
{
{
1124
%Q
I
|
1125
%R
}
}
1126
%S
~
~
1127
Undefined
7013
ENTER
1The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 7-15 or page 11-8. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
Table I-2 ALT Key Character Set
ALT Keys
2064
ALT 2
2065
ALT A
2066
ALT B
2067
ALT C
2068
ALT D
2069
ALT E
2070
ALT F
2071
ALT G
2072
ALT H
2073
ALT I
2074
ALT J
2075
ALT K
2076
ALT L
2077
ALT M
Keystroke
ASCII Character Sets I - 7
Table I-2 ALT Key Character Set (Continued)
ALT Keys
Keystroke
2078
ALT N
2079
ALT O
2080
ALT P
2081
ALT Q
2082
ALT R
2083
ALT S
2084
ALT T
2085
ALT U
2086
ALT V
2087
ALT W
2088
ALT X
2089
ALT Y
2090
ALT Z
Table I-3 GUI Key Character Set
GUI Key
Keystroke
3000
Right Control Key
3048
GUI 0
3049
GUI 1
3050
GUI 2
3051
GUI 3
3052
GUI 4
3053
GUI 5
3054
GUI 6
3055
GUI 7
3056
GUI 8
3057
GUI 9
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The AppleTM iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
I - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table I-3 GUI Key Character Set (Continued)
GUI Key
Keystroke
3065
GUI A
3066
GUI B
3067
GUI C
3068
GUI D
3069
GUI E
3070
GUI F
3071
GUI G
3072
GUI H
3073
GUI I
3074
GUI J
3075
GUI K
3076
GUI L
3077
GUI M
3078
GUI N
3079
GUI O
3080
GUI P
3081
GUI Q
3082
GUI R
3083
GUI S
3084
GUI T
3085
GUI U
3086
GUI V
3087
GUI W
3088
GUI X
3089
GUI Y
3090
GUI Z
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The AppleTM iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
Table I-4 PF Key Character Set
PF Keys
4001
PF 1
4002
PF 2
4003
PF 3
4004
PF 4
4005
PF 5
4006
PF 6
4007
PF 7
4008
PF 8
4009
PF 9
4010
PF 10
4011
PF 11
4012
PF 12
4013
PF 13
4014
PF 14
4015
PF 15
4016
PF 16
Keystroke
ASCII Character Sets I - 9
I - 10 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table I-5 F key Character Set
F Keys
5001
F 1
5002
F 2
5003
F 3
5004
F 4
5005
F 5
5006
F 6
5007
F 7
5008
F 8
5009
F 9
5010
F 10
5011
F 11
5012
F 12
5013
F 13
5014
F 14
5015
F 15
5016
F 16
5017
F 17
5018
F 18
5019
F 19
5020
F 20
5021
F 21
5022
F 22
5023
F 23
5024
F 24
Keystroke
Table I-6 Numeric Key Character Set
Numeric Keypad
6042
*
6043
+
6044
Undefined
6045
-
6046
.
6047
/
6048
0
6049
1
6050
2
6051
3
6052
4
6053
5
6054
6
6055
7
6056
8
6057
9
6058
Enter
6059
Num Lock
Keystroke
ASCII Character Sets I - 11
I - 12 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table I-7 Extended Key Character Set
Extended Keypad
7001
Break
7002
Delete
7003
Pg Up
7004
End
7005
Pg Dn
7006
Pause
7007
Scroll Lock
7008
Backspace
7009
Tab
7010
Print Screen
7011
Insert
7012
Home
7013
Enter
7014
Escape
7015
Up Arrow
7016
Dn Arrow
7017
Left Arrow
7018
Right Arrow
Keystroke
APPENDIX J COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
FUNCTIONALITY
Functionality Supported via Communication (Cable) Interface
Table J-1 lists supported scanner functionality by communication protocol.
Table J-1 Communication Interface Functionality
Communication Interfaces
Data Transmission
Functionality
Remote Management
USB
HID Keyboard Emulation
Supported
Not Available
Simple COM Port Emulation
Not Available
Not Available
SSI over CDC COM Port Emulation
Supported
Supported
IBM Table-Top USB
Supported
Supported
IBM Hand-Held USB
Supported
Supported
USB OPOS Hand-Held
Supported
Supported
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) without Imaging Interface
Supported
Supported
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging Supported Interface
Supported
Image and Video Transmission
Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available
Not Available
J - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Table J-1 Communication Interface Functionality (Continued)
Communication Interfaces
RS-232 Standard RS-232 ICL RS-232 Fujitsu RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode B Olivetti ORS4500 Omron CUTE OPOS/JPOS SSI IBM 4690 Hand-Held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B) Table-Top Scanner Emulation (Port 17) Non-IBM Scanner Emulation (Port 5B) Keyboard Wedge IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles IBM AT Notebook
Data Transmission
Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
Supported Supported Supported
Supported Supported
Functionality Remote
Management
Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Supported
Not Available Supported Supported
Not Available Not Available
Image and Video Transmission
Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available
Not Available Not Available Not Available
Not Available Not Available
APPENDIX K SIGNATURE CAPTURE CODE
Introduction
CapCode, a signature capture code, is a special pattern that encloses a signature area on a document and allows a scanner to capture a signature. There are several accepted patterns that allow automatic identification of different signatures on the same form. For example, on the federal tax return 1040 form there are three signature areas, one each for two joint filers, and one for a professional preparer. By using different patterns, a program can correctly identify all three, so they can be captured in any sequence and still be identified correctly.
NOTE Although the DS2278 digital scanner supports signature capture, the quality of the image is not guaranteed. If the image does not meet your needs it is recommended that you upgrade to a DS8178 scanner.
Code Structure
Signature Capture Area
A CapCode is printed as two identical patterns on either side of a signature capture box, as shown in Figure K-1. Each pattern extends the full height of the signature capture box. The box is optional, so you can omit it, replace it with a single baseline, or print a baseline with an "X" on top of it towards the left, as is customarily done in the US to indicate a request for signature. However, if an "X" or other markings are added in the signature box area, these are captured with the signature.
] tÇx WxÉ
Figure K-1 CapCode
K - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
CapCode Pattern Structure
A CapCode pattern structure consists of a start pattern followed by a separator space, a signature capture box, a second separator space, and then a stop pattern. Assuming that X is the dimension of the thinnest element, the start and stop patterns each contains 9X total width in 4 bars and 3 spaces. A 7X quiet zone is required to the left and to the right of the CapCode pattern.
Capture Box
Quiet Zone
Start
Separator Spaces
Stop
Quiet Zone
Figure K-2 CapCode Structure The separator spaces on either side of the signature capture box can be between 1X and 3X wide.
Start / Stop Patterns
Table K-1 lists the accepted start / stop patterns. The bar and space widths are expressed as multiples of X. You must use the same pattern on either side of a signature capture box. The type value is reported with the captured signature to indicate the purpose of the signature captured.
Table K-1 Start / Stop Pattern Definitions
Bar/Space Patterns
B
S
B
S
B
S
B
Type
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
5
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
7
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
8
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
9
Signature Capture Code K - 3
Table K-2 lists selectable parameters used to generate the image of the captured signature.
Table K-2 User Defined CapCode Parameters
Parameter
Defined
Width
Number of pixels
Height
Number of pixels
Format
JPEG, BMP, TIFF
JPEG quality
1 (most compression) to 100 (best quality)
Bits Per Pixel (not applicable to JPEG format)
1 (2 levels) 4 (16 levels)
8 (256 levels)
BMP format does not use compression, JPEG and TIFF formats do.
Dimensions
The size of the signature capture box is determined by the height and separation of the start and stop patterns. The line width of the signature capture box is insignificant.
The thinnest element width, referred to here as X, is nominally 10 mils (1 mil = 0.0254 mm). Select this as an exact multiple of the pixel pitch of the printer used. For example, when using a 203 DPI (dots-per-inch) printer and printing 2 dots per module, the resulting X dimension is 9.85 mils.
Data Format
The decoder output is formatted according to Table K-3. Zebra decoders allow different user options to output or inhibit bar code type. Selecting "Symbol ID" as the bar code type for output identifies the CapCode with letter "i".
Table K-3 Data Format
File Format (1 byte)
Type (1 byte)
Image Size (4 bytes, BIG Endian)
Image Data
JPEG - 1 BMP - 3 TIFF - 4
See Table K-1, last column
(Same bytes as in a data file)
K - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Additional Capabilities
Regardless of how the signature is captured, the output signature image is de-skewed and right-side up. A scanner that captures signatures automatically determines whether it is scanning a signature or a bar code. You can disable the signature capturing capability in a decoder.
Signature Boxes
Figure K-3 illustrates the five acceptable signature boxes:
Type 2:
Type 5:
Type 7:
Type 8:
Type 9:
Figure K-3 Acceptable Signature Boxes
APPENDIX L NON-PARAMETER ATTRIBUTES
Introduction
This appendix defines non-parameter attributes.
Attributes
Model Number
Attribute #533
Model number of the scanner. This electronic output matches the printout on the physical device label, for example DS2278-SR00007ZZWW.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
S 18 R Variable
Serial Number
Attribute #534
Unique serial number assigned in the manufacturing facility. This electronic output matches the printout on the physical device label, for example M1J26F45V.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
S 16 R Variable
L - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Date of Manufacture
Attribute #535
Date of device manufacture assigned in the manufacturing facility. This electronic output matches the printout on the physical device label, for example 30DEC16 (which reads the 30th of April 2014).
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
S 7 R Variable
Date of First Programming
Attribute #614
Date of first electronic programming represents the first time settings where electronically loaded to the scanner either by 123Scan or via SMS, for example 30DEC16 (which reads the 30th of December 2016).
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
S 7 R Variable
Configuration Filename
Attribute #616
The name assigned to the configuration settings loaded electronically to the device either by 123Scan or via SMS.
NOTE Scanning the Set Defaults bar code automatically changes the configuration filename to factory defaults.
To indicate the configuration settings loaded to the device were changed, the configuration filename changes to Modified upon scanning any parameter bar code.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
S 17 RW Variable
Beeper/LED
Attribute #6000
Activates the beeper and/or LED.
Type
X
Size (Bytes)
N/A
User Mode Access W
Values:
Beep / LED Action
Value
1 high short beep
0
2 high short beeps
1
3 high short beeps
2
4 high short beeps
3
5 high short beeps
4
1 low short beep
5
2 low short beeps
6
3 low short beeps
7
4 low short beeps
8
5 low short beeps
9
1 high long beep
10
2 high long beeps
11
3 high long beeps
12
4 high long beeps
13
5 high long beeps
14
1 low long beep
15
2 low long beeps
16
3 low long beeps
17
4 low long beeps
18
5 low long beeps
19
Fast warble beep
20
Slow warble beep
21
High-low beep
22
Low-high beep
23
High-low-high beep
24
Low-high-low beep
25
High-high-low-low beep 26
Green LED off
42
Green LED on
43
Red LED on
47
Red LED off
48
Non-Parameter Attributes L - 3
L - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Parameter Defaults
Attribute #6001
This attribute restores all parameters to their factory defaults.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
X
N/A
W
0 = Restore Defaults 1 = Restore Factory Defaults 2 = Write Custom Defaults
Beep on Next Bootup
Attribute #6003
This attribute configures (enables or disables) beep on next boot up of scanner.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
X N/A W 0 = Disable beep on next bootup 1 = Enable beep on next bootup
Reboot
Attribute #6004
This attribute initiates a device reboot.
Type
X
Size (Bytes)
N/A
User Mode Access W
Values
N/A
Host Trigger Session
Attribute #6005
This attribute triggers a decode session similar to manually depressing the scanner trigger button.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
X N/A W 1 = Start Host Trigger Session 0 = Stop Host Trigger Session
Non-Parameter Attributes L - 5
Firmware Version
Attribute #20004
The scanner's operating system version. For example, PAADES00-001-R00D0.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
S Variable R Variable
ImageKit Version
Attribute #20008
Identifies the 1D decode algorithms resident on the device, for example IMGKIT_7.03T01.
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
S Variable R Variable
In Cradle Detect
Attribute #25000
Type Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
Byte 1 R 0 - Out of cradle 1 - In cradle
Charging
Attribute #25002
Type
Byte
Size (Bytes) User Mode Access Values
1 R 0 - Not charging 1 - Charging
L - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
Battery Charge State
Attribute # 30042
Type
Flag
Size (Bytes)
1
User Mode Access R
Values
0 - Not full
1 - Full
INDEX
Numerics
123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 2D bar codes
aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-90 aztec inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-91 code 128 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-84 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-85 data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-86 data matrix mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-87 grid matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-93 grid matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-93 grid matrix mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-94 GS1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-85 GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-89 han xin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-92 han xin inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-92 maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-88 microPDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-83 microQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-89 PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-83 QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-88 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40
A
accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 shielded cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 invalid rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 transmit error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
ADF programming indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 advanced data formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 13-3 aiming
orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
aiming options hand-held decode aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
aiming pattern enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
ASCII values keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10 RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
attributes, non-parameter battery charge state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-6 beep on next bootup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-4 charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-5 configuration filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2 date of first programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2 date of manufacture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2 firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-5 host trigger session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-4 imagekit version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-5 in cradle detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-5 model number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1 parameter defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-4 reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-4 serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1
auto-reconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22, 5-26, 5-29 aztec bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13
B
bar code defaults radio communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
bar codes Australia post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-99 Australia post format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-100 auto-reconnect in Bluetooth keyboard emulation (HID slave) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 auto-reconnect interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-90
Index - 2 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
aztec inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-91 batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31, 5-33 battery preservation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 battery shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 beep on insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 beeper duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 beeper tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 beeper volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Bluetooth friendly name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Bluetooth technology support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3, H-1 Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-64 codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-56 codabar CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-58 codabar lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-56, 12-57 codabar NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-58 codabar start and stop characters . . . . . . . . . 12-59 code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43 code 11 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-45 code 11 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43 code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26 code 128 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-84 code 128 fnc4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31 code 128 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26 code 128 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32 code 128 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-31, 12-32 code 32 prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34 code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33 code 39 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36 code 39 full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37 code 39 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-35, 12-36 code 39 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40 code 39 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-38, 12-39 code 39 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37 code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40 code 93 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-41 composite beep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-82 composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-79 composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-78 composite inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-80 composite TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-79 continuous bar code read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 convert code 39 to code 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34 convert GS1 databar to UPC/EAN/JAN . . . . . 12-71 convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23 convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23 country code page defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 country code pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5 country codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-85 data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-86
data matrix mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-87 decode mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 decode session timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 direct decode indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 disable all code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-53 discrete 2 of 5 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-54, 12-55 EAN/JAN zero extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24 EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 eclevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 enable all code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 escape characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-95 event reporting
boot up event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 decode event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 parameter event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 febraban . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-51 flush macro buffer/abort macro PDF entry . . . 12-95 FN1 substitution values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 grid matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-93 grid matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-93 grid matrix mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-94 GS1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-85 GS1 databar bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-70 GS1 databar expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-71 GS1 databar limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-70 GS1 databar limited margin check . . . . . . . . . 12-72 GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-70 GS1 databar security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-73 GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-89 GS1-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27 GS1-128 emulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-82 han xin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-92 han xin inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-92 hand-held decode aiming pattern . . . . . . 4-18, 4-19 hands-free mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 HID device conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 I 2 of 5 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-49 I 2 of 5 convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-50 I 2 of 5 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-53 I 2 of 5 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52 I 2 of 5 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-50 IBM bar code configuration directive . . . . . . . . . 10-6 beep directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 convert unknown to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 IBM specification version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 port address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 illumination brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 intercharacter gap size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-78
interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-46 convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . 12-50, 12-51, 12-52
interleaved 2 of 5 lengths . . . . . . . . . . .12-47, 12-48 inverse 1D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-69 ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28 ISBT concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-29, 12-30 ISBT concatenation redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30 ISSN EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 Japan postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-98 keyboard wedge
alternate numeric keypad emulation . . . . . . 11-6 caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 convert case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 intra-keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 quick keypad emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 simulated caps lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 Korean 3 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-68 lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 low light enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 low light scene detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 mailmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-102 manufacturing information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-64 matrix 2 of 5 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-67 matrix 2 of 5 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-65, 12-66 maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-88 microPDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-83 microQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-89 mobile phone/display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 motion tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-59 MSI check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-63 MSI check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-62 MSI lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-60 MSI reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-63 MSI transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-62 Netherlands KIX code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-101 numeric bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3, H-1 parameter scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 PDF prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 PDF prioritization timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-83 picklist mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 pid type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 pid value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-96 prefix/suffix values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-88 quiet zone level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-77
Index - 3
radio Apple iOS virtual keyboard toggle . . . . . . . . 5-16 auto-reconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 beep on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 beep on insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 bluetooth friendly name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 bluetooth HID wait for connection . . . 5-15, 5-16 bluetooth radio state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 bluetooth security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 classic bluetooth and low energy . . . . . . . . 5-34 connection maintenance interval . . . . . . . . 5-29 convert case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 cradle bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 discoverable mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 emulate keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 fast HID keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 HID bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 HID caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 HID function key mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 HID ignore unknown characters . . . . . . . . . 5-18 HID keyboard FN1 sub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 HID keyboard keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 link supervision timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 output power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 pairing methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 persistent batch storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 quick keypad emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 SSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 SSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 toggle pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 unpairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 wi-fi friendly channel exclusion . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 wi-fi friendly mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
reconnect attempt beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 reconnect attempt interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 redundancy level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-74 RS-232
baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 beep on bel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 check receive errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 hardware handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11, 9-12 host serial response timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 intercharacter delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 nixdorf beep LED options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 software handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13, 9-14 stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Index - 4 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1 scan data options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-76 send versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 signature capture bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 signature capture file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 signature capture height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 signature capture JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 signature capture width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 SSI
baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 check parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 data packet format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 host character time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 host RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 host serial response timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 interpacket delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 multipacket option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 software handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 stop bit select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 suppress power up beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 symbologies default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 tab key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 time delay to low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 timeout between decodes, different symbols . . 4-23 timeout between decodes, same symbol . . . . . 4-23 transmit code 11 check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-46 transmit code ID character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 transmit matrix 2 of 5 check digit . . . . . . . . . . 12-67 transmit no read message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 transmit UK postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-98 transmit US postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-97 trigger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 trigger modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 trioptic code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33 UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24 UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-97 unicode output control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 unique bar code reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 unpair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 unsolicited heartbeat interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 UPC composite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-81 UPC reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25 UPC/EAN/JAN supplemental AIM ID format . . 12-17 UPC/EAN/JAN supplemental redundancy . . . 12-16 UPC/EAN/JAN supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 UPC-A check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18 UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20 UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 UPC-E check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18 UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21 UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 UPC-E1 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19 UPC-E1 preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22 UPU FICS postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-102 US planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-96 US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-96 USB
bar code configuration directive . . . . . . . . . 7-18 beep directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 CDC beep on bel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 convert case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 convert unknown to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 country keyboard types (country codes) . . . . B-2 default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 device type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 direct I/O beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 fast HID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 function key mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 IBM specification version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 keyboard FN1 substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 keypad emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 keypad emulation with leading zero . . . . . . 7-14 keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 native firmware update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 polling interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 quick emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 simulated caps lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 SNAPI handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 static CDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 user preferences default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail . . . . . . 12-101 variable PIN code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 wi-fi friendly channel exclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 wi-fi friendly mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 batch mode stored data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 battery charging notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 charging with cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 charging with micro USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 preservation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 beeper definitions pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Index - 5
beeper indicators ADF programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 macro pdf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 parameter programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Bluetooth encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 HID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8, 5-15, 5-24 pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 pin code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 secure simple pairing IO capability . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 serial port profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 set friendly name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 SPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22, 5-29
bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3, 1-10 bullets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xix
C
cable configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 shielded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 character sets keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10 RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 charging battery cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 micro USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Chinese 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-64 chinese 2 of 5 bar codes sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7 CJK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 cleaning the device approved for standard devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 cleaning the devices how to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 known harmful ingredients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 codabar bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-56 CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-58 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-56, 12-57 NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-58 start and stop characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-59 code 11 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-45
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-46 code 128 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26 fnc4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31 GS1-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27 ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28 ISBT concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29, 12-30 ISBT concatenation redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31, 12-32 code 128 emulation bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-84 code 39 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36 code 32 prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34 code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33 code 39 security Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-38, 12-39 convert code 39 to code 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34 full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-35, 12-36 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1, F-5 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37 trioptic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33 code 93 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-41 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5 code ID character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 code identifiers AIM code IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3 modifier characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4 Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 communication protocol cable interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1 composite bar codes beep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-82 composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-79 composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-78 composite inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-80 composite TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-79 GS1-128 emulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-82 UPC composite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-81 configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xviii product line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xviii configuring scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 connecting IBM host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 keyboard wedge interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 lost connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Index - 6 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
conventions notational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xix
country code page defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 country code pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5 country codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 cradle
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 inserting scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 presentation
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 supply power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 cradle indicators charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 standard use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 cradle indicators (host controlled) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
D
data matrix bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-85 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11
decode zones ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 radio communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 SSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
digital scanner features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
discrete 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-53 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-54, 12-55
E
eclevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 error indications
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 miscellaneous scanner options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 exposure options illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 low light enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
F
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
G
gs1 data matrix bar codes sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12
GS1 databar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-70 GS1 databar bar codes
convert GS1 databar to UPC/EAN/JAN . . . . . 12-71 GS1 databar expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-71 GS1 databar limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-70 GS1 databar limited margin check . . . . . . . . . 12-72 GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-70 GS1 databar security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-73 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8 GS1 QR bar codes sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13
H
han xin bar codes sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-14
HID Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 host specific indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 host types
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
I
IBM connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 low light scene detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
image options signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-46 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-49 convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-50 febraban . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-51 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-47, 12-48 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-53 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-50
K
keyboard types (country codes)
Index - 7
Albanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 Arabic (101) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 Arabic (102) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 Arabic (102) Azerty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 Azeri (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 Azeri (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 Belarusian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 Bosnian (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 Bosnian (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3, B-4 Bulgarian (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 Bulgarian Cyrillic (Typewriter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 Canadian French (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 Canadian French Win7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 Canadian Multilingual Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 Chinese (ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 Croatian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5 Czech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5 Czech (Programmer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5 Czech (QWERTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5 Danish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5 Dutch (Netherlands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 Estonian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 Faeroese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 Finnish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 French (Canada) 2000/XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7 French (Canada) 95/98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 French (France) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 French International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 Galician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7 German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7 Greek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7 Greek (220) Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7 Greek (319) Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7 Greek 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8 Greek 319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8 Greek Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7 Greek Polytonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8 Hebrew Israel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8 Hungarian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8 Hungarian_101KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8 Irish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9 Islandic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8 Italian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9 Italian (142) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9 Japanese (ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9 Kazakh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9 Korean (ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9, B-10 Kyrgyz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10 Latin American . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10 Latvian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10 Latvian (QWERTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10 Lithuanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10 Lithuanian (IBM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10 Macedonian (FYROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
Maltese_47KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11 Mongolian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11 Norwegian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11 Polish (214) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11 Polish (Programmer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11 Portuguese (Brazil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11 Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12 Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12 Portuguese (Portugal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12 Romanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12 Romanian (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12 Romanian (Programmer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13 Romanian (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12 Russian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13 Russian (Typewriter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13 Serbian (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13 Serbian (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13 Slovak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13 Slovak (QWERTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14 Slovenian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14 Spanish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14 Spanish (Variation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14 Swedish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14 Swiss French . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14 Swiss German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14 Tatar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15 Thai (Kedmanee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15 Turkish F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15 Turkish Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15 UK English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15 Ukranian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15 US Dvorak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15 US Dvorak Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16 US Dvorak Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16 US English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 US International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16 Uzbek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16 Vietnamese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16 keyboard wedge connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 korean 2 of 5 bar codes sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7 Korean 3 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-68
L
LED indicators ADF programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 cradle, host controlled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Index - 8 DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
macro pdf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 parameter programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 locked pairing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 locked pairing mode bar codes radio pairing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 low light enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
M
macro PDF escape characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-95 flush buffer/abort PDF entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-95
macro pdf indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
approved cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 how to clean the devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 known harmful ingredients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 master serial port profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22, 5-26 matrix 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-64 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-67 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-65, 12-66 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-67 maxicode bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-88 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12 micro USB cable charging battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 convert CDC device to HID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 HID device conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 microPDF417 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-83 microQR code bar codes sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13 MSI bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-59 check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-63 check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-62 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-60 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-63 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-62 msi bar codes sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
N
non-parameter attributes battery charge state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-6 beep on next bootup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-4 charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-5
configuration filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2 date of first programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2 date of manufacture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2 firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-5 host trigger session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-4 imagekit version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-5 in cradle detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-5 model number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1 parameter defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-4 reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-4 serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1 notational conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
O
out of range indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
P
pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 bar code format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 connection maintenance interval . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 master/slave setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3, 5-26, A-2 on contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, A-2 pin codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 radio communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 unpair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
pairing beeper definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 parameter defaults
radio communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 parameter programming indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 parameters
batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31, 5-33 beep on insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Bluetooth technology support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 persistent batch storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 radio communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
auto-reconnect interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31, 5-33 connection maintenance interval . . . . . . . . 5-29 host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 persistent batch storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 reconnect attempt beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 reconnect attempt interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 unpair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 parts scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 PDF417 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-83
Index - 9
PDF prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11 PIN code static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 pinouts cradle signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 postal code bar codes sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-14 postal codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-96 Australia post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-99 Australia post format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-100 Japan postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-98 mailmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-102 Netherlands KIX code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-101 transmit UK postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-98 transmit US postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-97 UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-97 UPU FICS postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-102 US planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-96 US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-96 USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail . . . . . . 12-101 power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 product id (pid) value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 product id type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 product line configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Q
QR code bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-88, 12-89 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12
quick start guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
R
radio communication bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 bluetooth technology profile support . . . . . . . . . 1-10 pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 reconnect attempt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 reconnect attempt beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
radio communications defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
radio indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 range indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 reconnect attempt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 reconnect attempt beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 RS-232
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4, 9-6 RSM
commands and responses over SSI . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
S
sample bar codes aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13 chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7 code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6 code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4 code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1, F-5 code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11 gs1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12 GS1 databar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8 GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13 han xin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-14 interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6 korean 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7 matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7 maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12 microQR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13 msi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6 PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11 QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12 UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-14 UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1 US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-14
scanner parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 scanner to cradle support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 scanner(s) to cradle support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 scanning
aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 errors . . . . . . . . 4-2, 7-1, 8-10, 9-2, 10-2, 11-1, 12-2 hand-held mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 presentation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 radio communications sequence example . . . . . 5-2 sequence example . .4-2, 7-1, 8-10, 9-2, 10-1, 11-1,
12-2 setting parameters . . . .4-1, 5-1, 7-1, 8-10, 9-1, 10-1,
11-1, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 scanning indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 secure simple pairing IO capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 security
intercharacter gap size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-78 quiet zone level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-77 redundancy level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-74 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-76 Serial Port Profile master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22, 5-26 support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx setting defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 setup connecting a USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Index - 10DS2278 Digital Scanner Product Reference Guide
connecting an IBM most . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 connecting an RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 connecting keyboard wedge interface . . . . . . . 11-2 inserting scanner in cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 lost host connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 supplying power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 shut off battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 file format selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 signature capture options signature capture file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 simple serial interface baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1, 8-6 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3, 8-6 RSM commands and responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 RTS CTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 SPP master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22, 5-26 support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 SSI baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1, 8-6 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3, 8-6 RSM commands and responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 RTS CTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 stored data batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx symbology default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
T
technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 trigger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
U
unicode output control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
unlocked pairing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 unpairing
bar code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 UPC/EAN/JAN bar codes
bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18, 12-19 convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23 convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23 EAN/JAN zero extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24 EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 ISSN EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25 samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1 supplemental AIM ID format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 supplemental redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24 UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20 UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21 UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 UPC-E1 preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22 USB connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 user preferences bar codes batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31, 5-33 beep on insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 persistent batch storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
V
version bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
W
wi-fi friendly mode channel exclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
wireless indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Z
Zebra support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Zebra Technologies Corporation, Inc. 3 Overlook Point Lincolnshire, IL 60069, U.S.A. http://www.zebra.com © 2017 ZIH Corp and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. ZEBRA and the stylized Zebra head are trademarks of ZIH Corp, registered in many jurisdictions worldwide. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
MN-002915-02 Revision A - August 2017
Edited with pdfresizer.com GPL Ghostscript 9.26